Dodge 2006 Durango Owner Manual

SECTION

1

INTRODUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

3

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 4

STARTING AND OPERATING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

5

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

6

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

7

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

8

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 9

INDEX

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

10

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

䡵

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

䡵

How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

䡵

Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

䡵

Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents. You are urged to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar

威 parts, and is interested in your satisfaction.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a complete listing of all subjects.

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains

WARNINGS

against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury. It also contains

CAUTIONS

against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on a stamped plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the

Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.

NOTE:

It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.

INTRODUCTION 5

1

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵

A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

▫

Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

▫

Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

䡵

Ignition And Steering Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫

Ignition Accessory Delay Feature . . . . . . . . . . .14

䡵

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

▫

Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks . . . .14

䡵

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

▫

Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

▫

Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

▫

Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

䡵

Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .21

▫

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫

Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

▫

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

▫

Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .24

▫

Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

2

8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

䡵

Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .26

▫

To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

▫

To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

䡵

Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . .28

䡵

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

▫

Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

䡵

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

▫

Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

▫

Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

▫

Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

䡵

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

▫

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

▫

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .41

▫

Second Row Center Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

▫

Rear 60/40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point

Belt — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

▫

Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

▫

Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

▫

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .47

▫

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

▫

Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags . . . . . . . . . . .48

▫

Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

▫

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

䡵

Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .74

䡵

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

▫

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

▫

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9

▫

Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

2


A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The double sided keys may be inserted into the locks with either side up. The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with a bar code label affixed to the front. The bar code can be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer or a locksmith. If you received your keys without the bag, ask your dealer to give you the number.

NOTE:

Integrated keys (key and key fob combined) must be cut by the dealer. The dealer must have cutters that have enough clearance for integrated keys.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

If you open the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition lock, a continuous chime will sound to remind you to remove the key.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.

Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED

With this system, an electronically coded ignition key sends a signal to the vehicle electronics. If the electronics recognizes the signal, the vehicle will start and continue to run. If the system does not recognize the signal, the vehicle will start and run for 2 seconds, then shut off.

After six unsuccessful attempts at starting, the system will shut down until the correct key is used.

NOTE:

If the key is in the ignition switch, then all buttons on that transmitter will be disabled. The buttons

on the remaining transmitters will work. If the vehicle is moving 5 mph or more, then all the transmitter buttons are disabled for all keys.

NOTE:

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. Additional Sentry Keys or

Mobil Speed-pass™ devices held against or immediately adjacent to the ignition key when starting the engine may cause vehicle starting problems. If a problem occurs, remove the Sentry Key from the key-ring and attempt to start the vehicle again. Pagers, cell phones, walkman, etc.

will have no effect on this system.

The

⬙

Security Light

⬙ will illuminate for about 3 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position. If the vehicle electronics do not receive a valid signal from the ignition key, the

⬙

Security Light

⬙ will flash


continuously to signal that the vehicle has been immobilized. If the

⬙

Security Light

⬙ remains on during vehicle operation, it indicates a fault in the system electronics. If this option was ordered, all of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

2

Replacement Keys

NOTE:

Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number. This number is required for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the

Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure


consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which has never been programmed and needs to be cut.

NOTE:

When having the Sentry Key System serviced, bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.

Customer Key Programming

You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid keys by doing the following:

1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the ignition to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition back to the OFF position and remove the first key.

2. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition to the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the

⬙

Security Light

⬙ will begin to flash. Turn the ignition back to the OFF position and remove the second key.

3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch the ignition to the ON position within 60 seconds of having removed the second key. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. The

⬙

Security Light

⬙ will stop flashing, then turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.

The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this process to program up to a total of 8 keys.

General Information

This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with

RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK

In the LOCK position, the steering and ignition systems are locked to provide anti-theft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your vehicle, if the steering wheel is locked. Move the steering wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns easily. The key can be inserted or withdrawn only in the LOCK position. Push in on the key in the ignition lock cylinder to rotate to the

LOCK position.


Ignition Switch Positions

2


WARNING!

The key cannot be turned to LOCK until the selector is in the PARK position. Do not attempt to pull the shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK position.

NOTE:

The steering wheel will lock when the key is removed, and the steering wheel is turned around 115 degrees clockwise or 65 degrees counterclockwise from the center position.

Ignition Accessory Delay Feature

When the ignition is turned to OFF/LOCK position the accessory features on the vehicle will continue to operate for ten minutes or until the driver’s door is opened. The accessory features are: Power Windows, Sunroof, and

Radio. This feature can be turned off by the dealer.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY

Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks

All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the doors are unlocked using the key fob.

The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either the ignition is turned to the ON position or a key fob

LOCK button is pressed.

There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the interior lights off after 8 minutes if the ignition is OFF and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

All the doors can be “manually” locked from the inside by pushing down the door lock plunger, located at the rear of the door. Both front doors may be opened from the inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked position.

WARNING!

For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.


WARNING!

When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.

2


Power Door Locks

Power Door Lock Switches

Power Door Lock Switch Operation

Vehicles equipped with power door locks can be locked or unlocked from inside by either the use of the door lock switches located on the front doors or by pressing the

LOCK or UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob.

As a safety feature the doors will not lock when using the door lock switches during the following conditions:

•

The driver’s door is open while the key is in the ignition.

Automatic Door Locks

If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph

(24 km/h).

This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure:

1. Enter your vehicle and Close all doors.

2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure).


3. Place the key into the ignition.

4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position a minimum of four times; ending in the Off position (

Do not start the engine

).

2

5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch in the LOCK direction.

6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled.

7. To re-activate this feature, repeat the above steps.

8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat the above procedure.

Auto Unlock Feature

This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened (excluding the liftgate). This will


occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle has been driven (shifted out of

Park and all doors closed).

This feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks (Lock or Unlock).

Auto Unlock Feature Programming

Customer Programming sequence to enable or disable the Auto Unlock Feature:

1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.

2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this programming procedure).

3. Insert the key into the ignition.

4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position to the ON position a minimum of four times ending in the OFF position

(do not start the engine)

.

5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction.

6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed.

7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature.

8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat the above procedure.

Child Protection Door Lock

To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the childprotection door lock system.


2

Child Lock Location

Child Lock Details

To use the system, open each rear door and slide the control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage the child-protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.


WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

NOTE:

After setting the child protection door lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.

NOTE:

For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle.

Five Button Keyfob Shown

NOTE:

For the remote starting feature (if equipped), refer to the “Remote Starting System” section.

NOTE:

For the power liftgate feature (if equipped), refer to the “Power Liftgate” section.

NOTE:

Your vehicle’s keyfob may have three, four or five buttons (shown), depending on the optional features purchased with your vehicle.

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a minimum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE:

The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects.

To unlock the doors and liftgate:

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the parking lights will flash on twice.


The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure:

1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob.

2

2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the

UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed.

3. Release both buttons at the same time.

4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

NOTE:

Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security

Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.


5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.

To lock the doors and liftgate:

Press and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once.

Horn Chirp Programming

The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure:

1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the key fob.

2. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds. A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed.


4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.

5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed.

NOTE:

Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob, while you are inside the vehicle, will activate the Security

Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.


Flash Lamps with Lock Programming

1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.

2. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds, also press the LOCK button within 6 seconds. A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed.


4. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF position, and the key removed.

NOTE:

Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.

Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.



Using the Panic Alarm

To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.

When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash, and the horn will sound.

2

To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is started or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). During the Panic

Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped.


General Information


RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.

1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of batteries is five years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile or CB radios.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.

NOTE:

When entering program mode using that fob, all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle.

Use the Following procedure to program additional key fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key:

1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.

2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure).

3. Place the key into the ignition.

4. Turn the ignition to the ON position (

Do not start the engine

).

5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.

6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds, also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.

7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard.


8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously.

9. A single chime will be heard.

2

10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and release the UNLOCK button on the fob.

11. A single chime will be heard.

12. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional fobs.

13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.

14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard. After

60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.

NOTE:

If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact your dealer for details.


Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.

Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal.

Battery Sevice

2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves together.

4. Replace screw if equipped.

NOTE:

If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system monitors the vehicle doors, liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the system provides both audible and visual signals. The horn will sound repeatedly for 3 minutes and the headlights and security light in the instrument cluster will flash for an additional 15 minutes. The engine will not run until the system is disarmed.

To Set the Alarm:

The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are locked and closed the security light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming. The security light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.

NOTE:

If the security light stays on continuously during vehicle operation, have the system checked by your dealer.

To Disarm the System:

Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the doors. If something has triggered the system in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.

Check the vehicle for tampering.


The security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unprogrammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine will start and run for 2 seconds and then shut down.

After six unsuccessul attempts at starting the engine, the system will shut down until the correct key is used. To exit alarming mode, press the RKE Unlock button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key.

2

The security alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit.

NOTE:

You may accidentally activate the security system (horn sounds and lights flash) by entering the vehicle without using the key fob to unlock the door(s). The security system can be disarmed with the key fob’s


UNLOCK button or by inserting a programmed Sentry

Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON position.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Your Dodge Durango may be equipped with a remote starting system, which will allow the vehicle to be started up to 300 feet away from the vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is part of your ignition key.

In order to remote start your vehicle, the hood, liftgate, and all the doors must be closed.

To remote start your vehicle, press the LOCK button on the key fob once, then within three seconds press the

REMOTE START button twice. To indicate that the vehicle is about to start, the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly.

Five Button Keyfob

Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes. To cancel remote start, press the REMOTE

START button twice within two seconds.

To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the

UNLOCK button on the key fob. After the vehicle is unlocked, you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle, insert the key in the Ignition and move it to the RUN position, otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and automatically turn off.

Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:

•

If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500

•

Any engine warning lamps come on

•

The hood is opened

•

The hazard switch is pressed

•

The transmission is moved out of park.


The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start, where the remote start sequence was initiated but cancelled before the engine begins to crank. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position, then back to LOCK.

2

LIFTGATE

The liftgate can be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors.


NOTE:

When the engine is running from a Remote Start

(if equipped), the vehicle must first be unlocked by pressing the keyfob UNLOCK button prior to activating the Power Liftgate otherwise the engine will stop automatically.

Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release switch located in the exterior handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.

The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).

NOTE:

•

If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate, pressing the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the liftgate is closed.

Five Button Keyfob

Power Liftgate — If Equipped

The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Press the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.

When the remote keyless entry transmitter button is press two times and the “Lamp Flash” feature is enabled the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing.

The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the switch located on the overhead console.

NOTE:

•

In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open


the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate trim panel.

2

Power Liftgate Switch


WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away.

A beeping signal will sound two seconds before the liftgate starts to open or close.

NOTE:

•

If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.

•

There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.

•

The power liftgate must be in the full open position for any of the buttons to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, press the remote keyless entry transmitter or overhead console button to fully open the liftgate and then press again to close.

•

If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.

•

If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.

•

The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph

(0 km/h).

•

The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below

⫺

22° F (

⫺

30° C) or temperatures above 150° F

(65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches.

•

If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually.

•

If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power close. However, vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction.


WARNING!

•

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

•

If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed.

DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

2

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.

However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.


WINDOWS

Power Windows

Power Window Switches

Power Window Switches

The control on the left front door has up-down switches that give you finger tip control of all four power windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the passenger doors for passenger window control. The windows will operate only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and for ten minutes after the

ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.

This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer.

NOTE:

The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for ten minutes after the ignition it turned OFF.

Auto Down

The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.

Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the

Auto Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch.

Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors. To disable the window controls on the other doors, press the window lock button. To enable the window controls, press the window control button again.


Window Lockout Switch

2


OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, knee bolsters, front airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and if equipped left and right side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature

(refer to the Child Restraint section in this manual), can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

WARNING!

In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.

Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility

of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.

Everyone

in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.

This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.


WARNING!

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

2


WARNING!

•

Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

•

Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

Pulling Out Belt and Latchplate

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch

plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

Removing Slack From Belt

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”


WARNING!

•

A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

•

A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

•

A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. And a belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries.

Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

•

A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.

2


4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

WARNING!

•

A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

•

A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.

If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your dealer and have it fixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

Removing Slack From Belt

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.

If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If the front airbags are deployed the front pretensioning retractors must be replaced.


Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the front and second row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck. Push in on the anchorage release button to release the anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

2

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt


As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in the desired position. Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position.

WARNING!

A 20% seatback that is not fully latched in the upright position will not protect you properly.

Second Row Center Seat Belt

The center seating position in the second row has a seat belt assembly that can be converted from the normal emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode.

The seat belt should only be used in the automatic locking mode when a child seat is installed at this seating location.

When sitting in this seating location, ensure the seatback is fully engaged with the seatback latch by pushing rearward on the center seatback until you hear a click that signals latch engagement.

Automatic Locking Mode

To convert from the normal emergency locking mode to the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder belt portion and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor.

Allow some of the webbing to retract into the retractor, as the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound to indicate the seat belt is now in the automatic locking mode. Once the automatic locking mode has been activated, you will not be able pull the webbing back out of the retractor. To disengage the automatic locking mode, simply allow the seat belt to retract fully into the retractor to return the seat belt to the normal emergency locking mode.

Rear 60/40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point

Belt — If Equipped

The center three point seat belt for the third row rear seat may be disconnected to allow the 60% seat back to easily fold down. The keyed-buckle latch plate (small latch plate at the end of the belt) can be detached from the keyed seat belt buckle (buckle without a red release button) located on the left inboard side of the third row bench seat. Insert the ignition key into the center white slot on the keyed buckle. The small latchplate can be removed when the key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take up the surplus webbing, and insert the latch plates into the slots in the headliner for storage while the 60% seat back is folded down.


WARNING!

•

If the small (keyed buckle) latch plate and keyed buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide the proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.

•

When reattaching the small (keyed buckle) latch plate and keyed buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceeding procedure to detach the small latch plate from the keyed buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the small latch plate and keyed buckle.

2


To reattach the seat belt to the third row center seat, pull the small (keyed buckle) latch plate forward from the headliner slots and insert it into the keyed buckle until there is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the proper seat belt usage.

Third Row Center Seat Belt

Third Row Center Seat Belt

Headliner Stowage Slots


Seat Belt Pretensioners

The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of a collision. These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

2

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.


Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

(BeltAlert)

If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning

System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the

Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The

Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Once the warning is triggered it can be paused if the vehicle speed drops below 5 mph (8 km/h. The warning will be restarted if the vehicle speed becomes greater than 5 mph.

The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps:

NOTE:

The following steps must occur within the first

60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System

(BeltAlert).

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver’s seat belt.

DO NOT

start the engine or press the trip reset button.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the seat belt Warning Light to turn off. If during this time, the seat belt becomes unbuckled or the engine is cranked or started, programming will be cancelled.

3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt

buckled. A chime will sound immediately (once the feature has toggled). If during this time the ignition switch is turned out of the ON position or the timer expires, programming mode will be cancelled.

4. Programming mode will be cancelled after the feature has toggled with the seat belt still buckled or if the ignition switch is turned to the lock position or 10 seconds after the feature has toggled.

The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

NOTE:

Although the Enhanced Warning System

(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning

Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.


Seat Belts and Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

2

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.


WARNING!

Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not needed.

Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags

This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in

the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.

NOTE:

The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment.

The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size.

Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to

⬙

Occupant Classification System

⬙ in this section).

This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window bags, they are located above the side windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.

NOTE:

Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.


WARNING!

•

Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them. You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional. These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.

•

If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag. The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions.

•

If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

2


Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions.

NOTE:

The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classification System (refer to

⬙

Occupant Classification System

⬙ in this section) has determined the passenger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the

⬙ small child

⬙ category.

If your vehicle is so equipped, the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly.

Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.

1. Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.

Infants in rear-facing child restraints should

NEVER

ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.

An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.

You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly.

3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate.

4. If your vehicle has window bags, do not lean against the door or window, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.

5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the

Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the

⬙

If

You Need Customer Assistance

⬙ section later in this owner’s manual.


WARNING!

•

Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags.

•

Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.

•

If the vehicle has window bags, they also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

2


Air Bag System Components

The airbag system consists of the following:

•

Occupant Restraint Controller

•

Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped)

•

Airbag Warning Light

•

Driver Airbag

•

Passenger Airbag

•

Window Bags above Side Windows (If Equipped)

•

Steering Wheel and Column

•

Instrument Panel

•

Interconnecting Wiring

•

Knee Impact Bolsters

•

Front Acceleration Sensors

•

Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners

•

Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front

Passenger Seat

− Occupant Classification Module

− Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light

− Weight Sensors

How the Airbag System Works

•

The

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.

The ORC will not detect roll over.

The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions. These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.

During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.

Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light and PAD indicator light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the selfcheck, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The PAD indicator light will function normally (Refer to

⬙

Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light

⬙ in this section).

If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either


momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up.

WARNING!

Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right away.

2

•

The

Occupant Classification System (OCS)

is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag in the unlikely event that a rear-facing infant seat is in the front passenger seat.


NOTE:

Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.

•

The

Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light

(an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off. The PAD Indicator lamp illuminates the words

⬙

PASS AIR BAG OFF

⬙ to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags. When the right front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air bag will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag

Disable (PAD) indicator lamp is not illuminated.

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

The PAD indictor light should not be illuminated when teenagers, most children in a forward facing child restraint or booster seats, most children that can properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, and when an

adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat. In this case, the air bag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs.

For almost all properly installed rear facing child restraints, the PAD indicator light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not inflate. If the PAD indicator light is not illuminated, DO NOT assume the air bag is turned off and move the child restraint to the second row of seats. A deploying passenger air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat.

NOTE:

Even though this vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system, children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint (see section on child restraints).


Front Passenger

Seat Occupant

Passenger

Airbag Disable

(PAD) Indicator

Light

OFF

Airbag Status

Adult

Grocery Bags,

Heavy Briefcases and Other

Relatively Light

Objects

ON

ON

OFF

Empty or Very

Small Objects

OFF* OFF

* Since the system senses weight, some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.

The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system. Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of an adult

2


will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In this case, the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position

(with their feet on or near the floor) in order to be properly classified. Reclining the seat back too far may change how an occupant is classified by the OCS.

Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD

Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back does not touch anything placed on the second row of seats because this can also affect occupant classification.

Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.

If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.

If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning

Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.

This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight

sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD

Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time.

•

The

Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units

are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.

The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.

This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.

The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of


the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

•

The

Occupant Classification Module (OCM)

is located beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The

OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision.

•

Your vehicle has four

Weight Sensors

located between the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the

OCM.

2


•

The

Side Impact SRS Window Bags

are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC

(with side impact option) detects a collision requiring the window bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The window bag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

•

The

Knee Impact Bolsters

help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.

The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System

(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover.

The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:

•

Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.

•

Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way.

•

Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle.

•

Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover.

•

Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.

•

At no time should any supplemental restraint system

(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/

Mopar.


WARNING!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS).

2

If A Deployment Occurs

The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and then immediately deflate.


NOTE:

A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system. This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur:

•

The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.

They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal byproduct of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

•

It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the airbags, seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant

Classification System serviced as well.

Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!

•

Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or

•

add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system.

The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

•

Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video players on the right front passenger seat back. The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant. This could allow the passenger frontal

•

airbag to inflate when it is not desired.

You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount

•

or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.

It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself.

Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.


Enhanced Accident Response System

If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional, vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition, approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition switch is turned off.

2

Airbag Light

You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in an impact. While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system promptly:

•

The airbag light does not come on or flickers during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.

•

The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second interval.


•

The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working, the airbag control module may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your dealer if the fuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler

Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by

DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes

may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the US government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when:

1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved

2. Used in defense of litigation involving a

DaimlerChrysler Corporation product

3. Requested by police under a legal warrant

4. Otherwise required by law

Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:


•

Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status for electronically-controlled safety systems, including the airbag system

•

Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)

• ⬙

Time

⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage)

•

Airbag deployment level (if applicable)

•

Seatbelt status

•

Brake status (service and parking brakes)

•

Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)

•

Engine control status (including engine speed)

•

Cruise control status

•

Traction/stability control status

2


Child Restraint

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time - babies and children, too. Every state in the United

States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child:

Infants and Small Children

•

This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car bed must be installed in the second seating row only.

•

Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing: infant carriers and

⬙ convertible

⬙ child seats.

•

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg).

⬙

Convertible

⬙ child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the

LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the

LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System section.)

•

Rearward-facing child seats must

NEVER

be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position.

Older Children and Child Restraints

Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older than one year. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH - Child Seat

Anchorage System Section.)

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit


the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.

2

Children Too Large for Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

•

Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

•

The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible.

•

Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position.


•

If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.

WARNING!

•

Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

•

A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal to the infant.

Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint:

•

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it.

•

The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits.

•

Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it.

•

The second row outside seating positions and all third row seats have cinching latch plates. The second row center position has an automatic locking retractor.

These are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the

lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor, it will have a distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor.

Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Refer to

⬙

Automatic Locking Mode

⬙ earlier in this section.

•

Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer’s instructions tell you.

•

When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.


Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury.

2

LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower

Anchors and Tether for CHildren)

Your vehicle’s second row seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child


restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.

All three second row seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCHcompatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only.

Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,

NEVER

install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to the next section for typical installation instructions.

Second Row Seat Left Side

Second Row Seat Right Side


Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

System

We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system. The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back, and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each second row seating position located on the back of the seat. Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints

2


and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then attach the tether strap to the anchorage located on the back of the seat, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint and, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

NOTE:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.

Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat

Belt

The second and third row seats have either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If the seat belt


has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor, it will have a distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Refer to

⬙

Automatic Locking Mode

⬙ earlier in this section.

2


Second Row Seat Tether Anchors

Child Restraints in Third Row Seating (If

Equipped)

The third seating row is not capable of installing child restraints that require the use of a tether strap. There are no tether anchor provisions for the third seating row in your vehicle, the hooks in the rear floor are not designed to withstand the forces that may occur during a crash.

WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Do not install a child restraint that requires a tether strap in the third seating row (if equipped) of this vehicle.


Child Restraint Tether Anchor

There are tether strap anchorages behind each seating position in the second row. For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there is no Child Tether Anchorage provided for the third row of seats. To install child restraint tethers follow these instructions.

2

1. Place the child restraint in the second row of seats.

2. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor located on the seat back and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.


WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Follow the instructions below. See your dealer for help if necessary.

Transporting Pets

Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.

Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality, energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.

The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7.

NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS

MUST NEVER BE USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the break-in and is not an indication of difficulty.

SAFETY TIPS

Exhaust System

WARNING!

Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an extremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless. To avoid inhaling these gases, the following precautions should be observed:

•

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.


•

It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for more than a short period. If so, adjust your climate control system to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the controls in any position except OFF or RECIRC.

•

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

2

Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system; exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace or adjust as required.


Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.

Defrosters

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You can feel the air directed against the windshield.

Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The

Vehicle:

Tires

Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.

Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in the tread.

Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights as you turn them on. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for positive closing, latching and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check the area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected, the cause should be located and corrected.


2

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

▫

Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

▫

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .84

▫

Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

▫

Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

▫

Electric Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .86

▫

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .87

▫

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

▫

Automatic Dimming Driver’s Exterior

Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

䡵

Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

▫

Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

▫

Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

▫

UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

▫

Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

▫

Things You Should Know About Your

UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

3

80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

▫

Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 111

▫

Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners . . . . . . . . . . 112

▫

Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

▫

Adjustable Head Restraints — All Seating

Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

▫

8 - Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . 114

▫

4 - Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

▫

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 115

▫

Second Row 40/20/40 Seat — Fold And

Tumble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

▫

Third Row Seat Bench — If Equipped . . . . . . . 120

▫

Third Row 60/40 Folding — If Equipped . . . . 122

䡵

Driver Memory System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 125

▫

Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote

Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . 126

▫

Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫

To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory . . 127

▫

Self-Limiting Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

▫

Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control . . . . 128

䡵

To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

䡵

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫

Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫

Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫

Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

▫

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . 133

▫

Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights . . . . . 134

▫

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

▫

Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . 134

▫

Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

▫

Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

䡵

Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

▫

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

▫

Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

▫

High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 137

▫

Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫

Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81

䡵

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Off Control

Switch — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

䡵

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

䡵

Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . 141

▫

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

䡵

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 142

▫

To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫

To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫

To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

▫

To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫

To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

▫

To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

3


䡵

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫

BAS (Brake Assist System) – If Equipped

With ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

▫

TCS (Traction Control System) – If Equipped

With ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

▫

ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) . . . . . . . . . . 149

▫

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 150

䡵

Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

▫

Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

䡵

Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer . . . . 156

▫

US/M Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

▫

Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

▫

Global Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

▫

Step Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

▫

Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) . . . . . . . . 158

▫

Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫

Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫

Elapsed Time (ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫

C/T Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

▫

Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . 159

▫

Automatic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 159

▫

Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

▫

To Put Into a Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 160

▫

Outside Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

䡵

Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 162

▫

Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

▫

Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 166

▫

Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

▫

Erasing HomeLink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

▫

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button . . . 167

▫

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

䡵

Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

▫

Express Open Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

▫

Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169


▫

Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

䡵

Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

▫

Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off

(Battery Fed Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

䡵

Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫

Floor Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

䡵

Factory Installed Roof Luggage Rack . . . . . . . . . 174

䡵

Cargo Management System—If Equipped . . . . . . 176

3


MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror.

Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position

(toward rear of truck). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward windshield).

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated. This option also controls the driver side mirror when it is equipped with auto dimming glass.

Day/Night Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror


CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

3

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped

Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage.


Electric Remote-Control Mirrors

The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver’s door trim panel.

Remote Control Mirrors Switch

Mirror Directions

To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move. When finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.


WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror.

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.

Lighted Vanity Mirror

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

Heated mirrors are automatically activated when you depress the rear window defroster switch located on the instrument panel. The light will illuminate to indicate

3


that the heating elements are ON. Turning Off the rear window defroster or the ignition will deactivate the heated mirrors.

Automatic Dimming Driver’s Exterior Mirror — If

Equipped

This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying light glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside mirror and can be turned off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror.

HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —

IF EQUIPPED

UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands (e.g.,

⬙

Call” ѧ

“Mike” ѧ

”Work

⬙ or

⬙

Dial” ѧ

“248-555-1212

⬙

). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the

UConnect™ system.

NOTE:

The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth

⬙

Hands-Free Profile,

⬙ version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones.

UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.

The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name. Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard


that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.

Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in

English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).

The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the control buttons that will enable you to access the system.

UConnect™ Switches

The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-

Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,

3


Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details.

The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™ system can either be adjusted from the radio volume control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control

(right switch), if so equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect™ system such as

⬙

CELL

⬙ or caller ID on certain radios.

Operations

Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™ system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu structure. Voice commands are required after most

UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.

•

Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the voice on beep, which follows the

⬙

Ready

⬙ prompt or another prompt.

•

For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying

⬙

Setup

⬙ and then

⬙

Phone Pairing,

⬙ the following compound command can be said:

⬙

Setup Phone Pairing.

⬙

•

For each feature explanation in this section, only the combined form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command, when you are asked for it. For example, you can either use the combined form voice command

⬙

Phonebook New Entry,

⬙ or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands:

⬙

Phonebook

⬙ and

⬙

New Entry.

⬙

Please remember, the UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you.

Voice Command Tree

Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.

Help Command

If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know what your options are at any prompt, say

⬙

Help

⬙ following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.

To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.

Cancel Command

At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say

⬙

Cancel

⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.

However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu.


Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone

To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.

NOTE:

The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth

⬙

Hands-Free Profile,

⬙ version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones.

3

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have:

NOTE:

• www.chrysler.com/uconnect

• www.dodge.com/uconnect

• www.jeep.com/uconnect


The following are general phone to UConnect™ System pairing instructions:

•

Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

•

After the

⬙

Ready

⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙


⬙

•

When prompted, after the voice on beep, say

⬙

Pair a

Phone.

⬙

•

You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process.

•

The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular phone. Before attempting to pair phone, please see your cellular phone’s user manual (Bluetooth section) for instructions on how to complete this step.

•

For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name.

•

You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time, only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the

UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™ system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to

⬙

Advanced Phone

Connectivity

⬙

).

Dial by Saying a Number

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Dial.

⬙

•

System will prompt you to say the number you want call.

•

For example, you can say

⬙

234-567-8901.

⬙

The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination. The UConnect™ limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example,

234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid phone number - the closest valid phone number has ten digits.

•

The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios.


Call by Saying a Name

•

Press the “Phone” button to begin.

•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Call.

⬙

•

System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call.

•

After the

⬙

Ready

⬙ prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say

⬙

John Doe,

⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to

⬙

Add Names to Your UConnect™

Phonebook,

⬙ to learn how to store a name in the phonebook.

•

The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios.

3


Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook

NOTE:

Adding names to phonebook is recommended when vehicle is not in motion.

•

Press the “Phone” button to begin.

•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Phonebook New Entry.

⬙

•

When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say

⬙

Robert Smith

⬙ or

⬙

Robert

⬙ instead of

⬙

Bob.

⬙

•

When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.:

⬙

Home,

⬙ ⬙

Work,

⬙ ⬙

Mobile,

⬙ or

⬙

Pager

⬙

). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.

•

When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding.

After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.

The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language.

Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook

NOTE:

Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion.

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Phonebook Edit.

⬙

•

You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit.

•

Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.

•

When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing.

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu.

⬙

Phonebook Edit

⬙ can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s work number later using the

⬙

Phonebook Edit

⬙ feature.


Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook

NOTE:

Editing phonebook entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion.

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Phonebook Delete.

⬙

•

After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say

⬙

List

Names

⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries from the list, press the

⬙

Voice Recognition

⬙ button while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired entry and say

⬙

Delete.

⬙

3


•

After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, work, mobile or pager. Say the designation you wish to delete.

•

Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted.

After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.

Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Phonebook Erase All.

⬙

•

The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.

•

After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.

List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Phonebook List Names.

⬙

•

The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the phonebook entries.

•

To call one of the names in the list, press the

⬙

Voice

Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired name and say

⬙

Call.

⬙

NOTE: the user can also exercise

⬙

Edit

⬙ or

⬙

Delete

⬙ operations at this point.

•

The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to number designation you wish to call.

•

The selected number will be dialed.

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the

UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have.

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call

Currently in Progress

When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the

UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected.


Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call

Currently in Progress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The

UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.

3

Making a Second Call while Current Call in

Progress

To make a second call while you are currently in a call, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say

⬙

Dial

⬙ or

⬙

Call

⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the


second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to

⬙

Toggling Between Calls.

⬙

To combine two calls, refer to

⬙

Conference Call.

⬙

Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold

To put a call on hold, press the

⬘

Phone’ button until you hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the

⬘

Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.

Toggling Between Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one time.

Conference Call

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

Three-Way Calling

To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under

⬙

Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress.

⬙

After the second call has established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the

⬘

Phone’ button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.

Redial

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Redial.

⬙

•

The UConnect™ system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.

Call Continuation

Call continuation is progression of a phone call on

UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

•

After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or


until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone.

•

After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the

UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.

•

An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.

3

UConnect™ System Features

Language Selection

To change the language that the UConnect™ system is using,

•



•

After the

⬙

Ready

⬙ prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to

(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).

•

Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE:

After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages.

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable:

•

Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area.

If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system is operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Emergency

⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.

NOTE:

The emergency number dialed is based on the

Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and

Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area.

The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly.

Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in

emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.

Towing Assistance

If you need towing assistance,

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Towing Assistance.

⬙

NOTE:

The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-

528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico city in Mexico).

Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.


Paging

To learn how to page, refer to

⬙

Working with Automated

Systems.

⬙

Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time-out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect™ system.

Voice Mail Calling

To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to

⬙

Working with Automated Systems.

⬙

3

Working with Automated Systems

This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.

You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging service or automated customer service. Some services require immediate response selection, in some instances, that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.


When calling a number with your UConnect™ system that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word

⬙

Send.

⬙

For example, if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say

⬙

3 7 4 6 # Send.

⬙

Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by

⬙

Send

⬙ is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.

Barge In - Overriding Prompts

The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately. For example, if a prompt is playing

⬙

Would you like to pair a phone, clear a ѧ

,

⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say

⬙

Pair a Phone

⬙ to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off

Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Setup Confirmations.

⬙

The UConnect™ system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it.

Phone and Network Status Indicators

If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad

You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.

NOTE:

Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.


Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)

When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the UConnect™ system:

•

Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.

•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Mute.

⬙

3

In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:

•

Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.

•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Mute-off.

⬙


Information Service

When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone number

⬙

#121,

⬙ you can access voice activated automated system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.

related information.

Advanced Phone Connectivity

Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone

The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect™ system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice

Recognition’ button and say

⬙

Transfer Call.

⬙

Connect or Disconnect Link Between the

UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone

Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively

⬙ connected

⬙ with one electronic device at a time.

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular phone and the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user’s manual.

List Paired Cellular Phone Names

•


•

After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say

“Setup Phone pairing”.

•

When prompted, say

⬙

List Phones.

⬙

•

The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone being announced, press the

⬘

Voice recognition’ button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.

Select another Cellular Phone

This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system that you want to use it with.

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙

Setup Select Phone.

⬙

•

The phone names along with priority numbers will be announced.

•

When prompted say the priority number of the cellular phone you wish to select. You can also press the

⬘

Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is being played, then say the priority number of the phone that you wish to select.


•

The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately with in 30 feet) the vehicle.

3

Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones

•


•

After the

⬙

Ready


⬙


⬙

•

At the next prompt, say

⬙

Delete.

⬙

•

The phone names along with priority numbers will be announced.

•

When prompted say the priority number of the cellular phone you wish to delete. You can also press the


⬘

Voice Recognition’ button anytime while the list is being played and say the priority number of the phone you wish to delete.

Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™

System

Voice Recognition (VR)

•

Always wait for the beep before speaking.

•

Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet away from you.

•

Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period.

•

Performance is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,

• low road noise,

• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows,

• dry weather condition.

•

Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.

•

When navigating through an automated system, such as, voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say

⬙ send.

⬙

•

Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in motion is recommended.

•

It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect™ phonebook.

•

UConnect™ phonebook name tag recognition rate is optimized for the voice of the person who stored the name in the phonebook.

•

You can say

⬙

O

⬙

(letter

⬙

O

⬙

) for

⬙

0

⬙

(zero).

⬙

800

⬙ must be spoken

⬙ eight-zero-zero.

⬙

•

Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported.

Far End Audio Performance

•

Audio quality is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,

• low road noise,

• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows, and


• dry weather condition.

•

Operation from driver seat.

•

Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loudness to a large degree, rely on the phone and network, and not the UConnect™ system.

•

Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

3

Bluetooth Communication Link

Cellular phones have been found to occasionally lose connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth

⬙ on

⬙ mode.

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least five (5) seconds prior to using the system.



3


Primary

Zero

Add location

North American English

Alternate(s)

Oh

Add new

All

Confirmation prompts

Delete a name

Language

List names

List paired phones

Pager

Phone pairing

Phonebook

Return to main menu

Select phone

Set up

All of them

Confirmations prompts

Delete

Select language

List all

List phones

Beeper

Pairing

Phone book

Return. Main menu select

Phone settings phone set up


SEATS

Front Seat Manual Seat Adjustment

The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.

3

Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.


Manual Seat Adjuster

WARNING!

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked.

Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners

The bucket seats are equipped with recliners. The reclining mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right side of the passenger’s seat and the left side of the driver seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback is locked.


WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If

Equipped

The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located on the right side of the driver seat and on the left side of the passenger’s seat. Moving the lumbar control lever fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support.

Lumbar Support Adjustment Lever

Adjustable Head Restraints — All Seating

Positions

Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical, at least to the level of the ears.

3


To lower the head restraint, depress the release button located at the base of the head restraint and push down on the head restraint.

8 - Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped

The driver power seat switches are located on the left side of the driver seat lower side trim. The bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.

Head Restraint Adjustment

Power Seat Switch Location

4 - Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped

The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on the right side of the passenger seat lower side trim. The bottom switch controls forward/rearward adjustment.

The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.

NOTE:

The 4 - way seat does not have an up/down adjustment.


Front Heated Seats — If Equipped

3

Heated Seat Switches

This feature heats the driver and front passenger seats.

The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center of the instrument panel, below the climate controls. The heated seat system allows the driver and front


passenger to select from two different levels of supplemental electrical seat heating, or no seat heating to suit their individual comfort requirements.

With the ignition switch in the RUN position, depressing the heated seat switch rocker to its momentary High or

Low position provides power to the heated seat element and maintains the requested temperature setting. If the heated seat switch is depressed to a different position

(Low or High) than the currently selected state, the requested temperature setting will change to a new selection. If the heated seat switch is depressed a second time to the same position as the currently selected state, the seat heater will turn off.

NOTE:

The high heat setting will operate for approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, the system will automatically transition to the low heat setting. The low heat setting will operate for 30 minutes, then the system will turn off.

If the low heat setting is initially selected, the system will operate for 30 minutes and then turn off.

If the indicator lamp on the heated seat switch does not light, an indicator blinks when the switch is depressed or if the heated seats do not operate, the system should be serviced by a qualified technician.

WARNING!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.

Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.


Second row leather seats have seatback recliners at the

40% seating positions. Raising the lever allows the seatback to be reclined an additional 11 degrees.

Second Row 40/20/40 Seat — Fold and Tumble

The 40/20/40 seat configuration is standard on all models. This seat is equipped with a unique fold-and-tumble feature. The 40% seatbacks have spring loaded hinges which assist with the folding of the seatbacks.

Fold, Tumble, and Recline Lever

To Fold the 40% seatbacks fully raise the lever on the side of the seat to release the seatback. The seatback can now

3


be folded into the down position for use as a cargo floor, or the seat can now be tumbled forward to allow access to the rear of the vehicle.

To fold the 20% seatback, pull the strap forward to release the seatback. Fold the seatback down for use as an armrest or to carry cargo. When returning the seatback to the upright position, push the seatback rearward to latch the seatback. Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position.

WARNING!

The 20% seatback contains the center shoulder belt.

A 20% seatback that is not fully latched in the upright position will not protect you properly.

Fold, Tumble, and Recline Lever

To Tumble the 40% seat, fully raise the lever on the side of the seat to release the floor latches and tumble the seat.


WARNING!

Do not drive the vehicle with the outer 40% second row seats in the tumbled position. The outer 40% second row seats are only intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury.

NOTE:

The seatback must be fully folded into the down position to allow the lever to be raised enough to release the floor latches.

Tumble Lever

To Fold and Tumble the 2nd row 40% seats from the 3rd row, fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the seatback. Continue raising the lever to release the floor latches to tumble the seat.

NOTE:

The head restraints must be lowered but do not have to be removed to fold and tumble the seats.

3


Third Row Seat Bench — If Equipped

To Fold The Seats

Folding the third seat occurs in two stages: First the cushion is lifted and moved forward from the pockets at the front of the cushion. The cushion will rest onto the floor directly behind the second row seat. Second, the top of the back is folded forward and rests onto the cushion.

The back will not fold unless the cushion has been folded forward first.

Seat Cushion Pockets


3

Seat Cushion Movement Up And Forward

Rear Seat Folded

To Achieve Maximum Cargo Capacity

Pull the release handles and strap on the second row seats and fold flat. After folding the third row seat, unsnap the flipper panel on the third row seatback and flip it forward on the backs of the second row seats.


NOTE:

Before returning the second row 40% seats to their upright position, always snap the third row seat flipper panel(s) back to the third row seat first.

NOTE:

The seat belt buckles are hinged to fold with the seat back.

Third Row 60/40 Folding — If Equipped

WARNING!

Do not sit in the third row seat unless the cushion and back are properly engaged. Proper engagement can be verified by pushing/pulling on the upright seatback. The seatback will not move unless properly engaged.

Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row seatback(s) folded or tumbled. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.

Third Row Seat

Third Row Seat 40% Seatback Folded Down


3

Third Row Seat Features


Third Row Seat Folded Forward Third Row Seat Return Pull Strap

DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat position, driver’s outside mirror position, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals position, Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) temperature and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.


3

Your vehicle was delivered with two Remote Keyless

Entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can be linked to either memory position. The memory system can accommodate up to two transmitters, each transmitter linked to either of the two memory positions.


Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote

Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory

NOTE:

Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button (1 or 2) are pressed, you erase the memory settings for that button and store new settings.

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and both side view mirrors to the desired positions.

NOTE:

Not all motors may be moved at one time.

Please refer to the 8-way power seat description.

2. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions.

3. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).

4. Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) while the ATC is in Auto mode.

5. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the driver’s door.

6. Within 5 seconds, press and release memory button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be performed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a

Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory positions.

7. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the transmitters.

8. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

9. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to memory.

NOTE:

A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason.

Memory Position Recall

NOTE:

•

The driver’s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall memory positions.

•

The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory positions.

•

Not all motors may be moved at one time. Please refer to the 8-way power seat description.

To recall the memory settings for driver one, press memory button number 1 on the driver’s door or the

Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 1.

To recall the memory setting for driver two, press memory button number 2 on the driver’s door or the

Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 2.


A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or pressing any one of the power seat buttons, or pressing the adjustable pedals button, or pressing either the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter when not in the ignition switch. When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, and the pedals stop moving.

A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.

3

NOTE:

A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory was inhibited for any reason.

To Disable A Transmitter Linked to Memory

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key.

2. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located on the driver’s door.


3. Within 10 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter.

To disable another transmitter linked to either memory position, repeat steps 1-3 for each transmitter.

NOTE:

The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to memory is enabled when delivered from the factory. The capability to link Remote Keyless Entry transmitters to memory can be disabled (or later reenabled) by a qualified DaimlerChrysler representative.

Self-Limiting Control

To improve vehicle reliability, the memory system includes a self-limiting control for full travel positioning of power seat and Adjustable Pedal movement (all directions). This self-limiting control may however develop an unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is encountered at sometime during usage. One example of such an occurrence may include a box or package obstructing the full rearward movement of the driver’s seat.

Once the obstruction is removed, the self-limiting control may be restored to maximum position. The self-limiting control may be restored by first reaching the recently limited or obstructed position, then release and reactivate the same button or buttons. Continued seat travel beyond the obstructed position will indicate the recently encountered self-limitation has been cleared.

Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control

This additional feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle. The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key is removed from the ignition switch. The seat will move forward approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position. The Easy Exit and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if

the seat is positioned rearward enough and no benefit from moving the seat any farther rearward.

NOTE:

The Easy Exit Easy Entry feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory. The Easy Exit Easy

Entry feature may be enabled (or later disabled) by a qualified DaimlerChrysler service representative.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.


3


Then push the safety latch lever to the left. It is located between the grille and hood opening right of the center.

NOTE:

Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip before closing hood to prevent damage to grille.

WARNING!

If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.

Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving.

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

LIGHTS


3


Interior Lights

Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the second upward detent position, or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob. When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out. This allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.

The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the

⬙

Parade

⬙ mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.

Battery Saver

To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.

If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for eight minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8 minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for 8 minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.

NOTE:

Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is

ON.

NOTE:

While the engine is running, the system will deactivate the Fog Lights and Heated seats if a low battery system voltage is detected.

Headlight Delay

To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is cycled off while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. The headlights will remain


on for 90 seconds. Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch ON then OFF or by turning the ignition ON.

NOTE:

This feature can be disabled by your authorized dealer.

3

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

Automatic Headlights can be activated by rotating the rotary headlight switch to the symbol “A.” The headlights will turn on when the engine is running and the ambient light sensor indicates that the headlights should be activated. The headlights will turn off if the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or 90 seconds after the ignition is turned to OFF.


Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights

When the headlight switch is rotated to the first position to the right, the parking lights, taillights, side marker lights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are all turned on. The headlights will turn ON when the switch is rotated to the second position.

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.

Illuminated Entry

Headlights turn on for 90 seconds, when the Remote

Keyless Entry UNLOCK button is pressed.

NOTE:

This feature can be activated by your authorized dealer.

Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)

The headlights on your Durango will illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a constant “Lights

ON” condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at reduced intensity. If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn off. If the headlights are activated, the Daytime Running Lights feature will transition to the normal headlight operating mode.

Lights-on Reminder

If the headlights, parking lights, or courtesy lights are left

On, after the ignition is turned Off, a continuous fast chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened.

Fog Lights — If Equipped


position and pressing the fog light button. The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are ON or when the vehicle headlights are ON low beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pressed in, when the headlight switch is rotated to the OFF position, or the high beam is selected.

3

MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER

The multifunction control lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

The foglights are turned ON by placing the headlight rotary control in the parking light, headlight, or Auto


Turn Signals

Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or left-hand turn.

The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is defective.

If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system, the arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate.

You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down.

NOTE:

If a turn signal has been left on for at least a mile duration, a continuous chime will sound.

Passing Light

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released.

High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch

Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or

LOW beam.


Windshield Wipers

3

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed.

Intermittent Wiper System

The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,


with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range.

The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km) or less.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.

NOTE:

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or

Ice from the windshield.

NOTE:

If the front wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the

⬙

Park

⬙ position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers will resume operation.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately three wipes, after the wash knob is released.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.


ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) OFF

CONTROL SWITCH — IF EQUIPPED

ESP Off Control Switch

During normal driving conditions leave the ESP switch in the On position (indicator in cluster off). If the vehicle is 2WD and stuck or in a low traction condition such as

3


deep snow, sand, or gravel turn the system Off to improve traction. If the vehicle is 4WD, use 4HI position.

When the ESP is switched off, the ESP/TCS

Indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on. When the ESP is switched on, the Indicator light goes out.

To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, switch off the ESP by pressing the button switch. The ESP warning light will then be continuously illuminated.

With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque reduction feature is desensitized. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.

TILT STEERING COLUMN

To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn signal control and move the wheel up or down, as desired.

WARNING!

Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.


DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

3

The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to the steering wheel and pedals.


Adjustment

1. Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10 inches (254 mm) away from the airbag located in the center of the steering wheel.

2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts.

3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left of the steering column near the parking brake release, up to move the pedals toward the driver or down to move the pedals away from the driver.

4. The pedals

cannot

be adjusted when the vehicle is in

R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is SET.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal’s path.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, this device takes over accelerator operation at speeds greater than (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine). The controls are mounted on the steering wheel.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates when the system is on.


To Set At A Desired Speed

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the memory.

3


WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push and release the

RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above

(refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine).

To Vary The Speed Setting

When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the button is released, a new set speed will be established.

Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed increase (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by three increments.

Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed decrease (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3 times will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the table below (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine).

To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.


Functions

Engage Speed

3.7L

35 mph (56 km/h)

Minimun RESUME Speed 30 mph (50 km/h)

ACCEL Increase 2 mph (3km/h)

DECEL Decrease

Dropout Speed

1 mph (2 km/h)

30 mph (50 km/h)

To Accelerate For Passing

Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

NOTE:

When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000 feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded

(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the

SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below (refer to the table below for the speed for your specific engine), the speed control will automatically disengage. If this happens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed.

4.7L

35 mph (56 km/h)

30 mph (50 km/h)

2 mph (3km/h)

1 mph (2 km/h)

30 mph (50 km/h)

5.7L

25 mph (40 km/h)

20 mph (32 km/h)

1 mph (2 km/h)

1 mph (2 km/h)

20 mph (32 km/h)

Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.

To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to improve vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out overdrive by pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button located at the end of the gear shifter.

3


WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use

Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake

System), BAS (Brake Assist System), TCS (Traction Control System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) and ESP

(Electronic Stability Program). All five systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions, and are commonly referred to as

ESP.

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.

Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS.

NOTE:

ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers.

WARNING!

•

Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

•

The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

•

The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.


BAS (Brake Assist System) – if equipped with

ESP

ESP Off Switch Location

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then

3


applies optimum pressure to the brakes. The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the antilock brake system

(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired.

Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

•

BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

•

The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

•

The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

TCS (Traction Control System) – if equipped with

ESP

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.

This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the

“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability

Program)” in this Section of this manual. This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non-slipping wheels to provide optimal forward traction.


ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.

3

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.


WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.

•

ERM can not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

•

The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

•

Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

•

Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

ESP/TCS Indicator Light

The

⬙

ESP/TCS Indicator Light

⬙ starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active.

The

⬙


⬙ also flashes when TCS is active. If the

⬙


⬙ begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.


WARNING!

•

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded.

•

ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

•

The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

3

The ESP system has 2 available operating modes.


High Range (4WD Models) or 2WD Models

ON

This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD high range and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from

4WD low range or neutral back to 4WD high range, the

ESP system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most all driving situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons as noted below.

Partial Off

This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the “ESP OFF” Control

Switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine management portion of

ESP has been desensitized, the thresholds for ESP activation are raised, and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illuminated. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the “ESP-Control OFF” Control Switch. This will restore the normal “ON” mode of operation. ESP always operates under braking, even with the switch in the OFF-position.

WARNING!

In the Partial Off mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.

NOTE:

To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressing the ESP Control Switch. Once the

situation requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESP on by momentarily depressing the “ESP Control Switch”. This may be done with the vehicle is in motion.

4WD Low Range

Partial Off

This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD low range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD low range or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD high range or neutral to 4WD low range, the ESP system will be in this mode. In 4WD low range, ESP function is desensitized until the vehicle reaches a speed of 30 mph

(48 km/h). At 30 mph (48 km/h) the normal ESP stability function returns and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light” turns off. When the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph (40 km/h) the ESP system goes back to Partial Off. ESP is desensitized at low vehicle speeds in 4WD low range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP


function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h). The ABS is in a special

Off-Road mode that allows too look wheels at lower speed if gravel is detected to gain stopping distance.

NOTE:

When the vehicle is in 4WD low range, a feature of the ESP system remains active whether the ESP is on or off. This feature functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across an axle. If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.

3


WARNING!

In the Partial Off mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.

ESP/BAS Warning Lamp and ESP/TCS Indicator

Light

The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning

Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the

ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

NOTE:

•

The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning

Lamp” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

•

Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

•

The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

The overhead console has the following features:

•

Courtesy Lights

•

Garage Door Opener — If Equipped

•

Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer — If

Equipped


Courtesy/Reading Lights

Near the front of the console are two courtesy/reading lights.

Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless

Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing the recessed area of the corresponding lens.

3

NOTE:

The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will extinguish after 15 minutes.


COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER

This feature allows you to choose between a compass/ temperature display and one of four trip conditions being monitored.

US/M Button

Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric measurement units.

RESET Button

When this button is pressed you will hear a confirmation beep. Use this button to reset the following displays:

Average Fuel Economy

Trip Odometer

Elapsed time.

Global Reset

If the RESET button and STEP button are pressed at the same time and held for 3 seconds (you will hear a confirmation beep) and the Global Reset feature will reset the distance to empty (using a default fuel economy value), fuel economy, trip odometer, and elapsed time displays.


Step Button

3

Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip conditions.


Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. This display mode becomes less sensitive to instantaneous changes in fuel consumption as the number of total vehicle miles since the last reset increases. It is suggested that this mode be reset periodically for general operation or when driving conditions change significantly (for example, at the end of a trip or when a trailer is connected or disconnected).

Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank. The estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level.

When Distance To Empty = 0, the fuel gauge pointer will initially be on the red “E” marker. At this point (fuel gauge pointer on the the red “E” marker) there is reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds to approximately 5% of tank volume. This reserve capacity was put in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions in areas where there aren’t many gas stations.

NOTE:

The Distance To Empty will remain equal to zero, until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled.

Trip Odometer (ODO)

This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset.

Elapsed Time (ET)

This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset.

C/T Button


Compass/Temperature Display

WARNING!

Even if the display still reads a few degrees above

32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible personal injury or property damage.

3

Use this button to select a readout of the outside temperature and one of eight compass headings that indicate the direction in which the vehicle is facing.

Automatic Compass Calibration

This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will be displayed.


After completing one 360° turn, with the vehicle traveling less than 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally.

Manual Compass Calibration

NOTE:

To ensure proper compass calibration, make sure the compass variance is properly set before manually calibrating the compass.

If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does not appear, you must manually put the compass into the

“Calibration” mode.

To Put Into a Calibration Mode

Turn on the ignition and set the display to “Compass/

Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button for 5 seconds to change the display to VAR (compass variance) mode, holding the button 5 additional seconds will display CAL (compass calibration) mode. When the CAL symbol is displayed complete one 360 degree turn in an area free from large metal objects or power lines. The

CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally.

Compass Variance

is the difference between magnetic north and geographic north. In some areas of the country, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.

If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according to the Compass Variance Map.

Compass Variance Map


To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the

RESET button approximately five seconds. The last variance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP button to select the new variance zone and press the

RESET button to resume normal operation.

3

Outside Temperature

Because the ambient temperature sensor is located underhood, engine temperature can influence the displayed temperature, therefore, temperature readings are slowly updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30 km/h) or during stop and go driving.


GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

The HomeLink

威

Universal Transceiver replaces up to three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries are needed.

For additional information on HomeLink

威

, call 1–800–

355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.

WARNING!

A moving garage door can cause injury to people and pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety information or assistance.

WARNING!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.

WARNING!

Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects.


Programming HomeLink

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to

HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

3

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and release only when the indicator lights (two dots below

House Symbol ) begin to flash (after 20 seconds).

Do not

hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and

do not

repeat step one to program a second and/or third handheld transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink buttons.


2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the indicator light (dots below House Symbol) in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons.

Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.

NOTE:

Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the

⬙

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

⬙ section.

4. The HomeLink indicator light (dots below House

Symbol) will flash slowly and then rapidly after

HomeLink successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from the slow to the rapid flash.

5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light

stays on

constantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

NOTE:

To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with

⬙

Programming

⬙

step two. Do not repeat step one.

If the indicator light blinks

rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with

ⴖ

Programming

ⴖ

steps 6-8

to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).

6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the

⬙ learn

⬙ or

⬙ smart

⬙ button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.


7. Firmly press and release the

⬙ learn

⬙ or

⬙ smart

⬙ button.

(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)

NOTE:

There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.

3

8. Return to the vehicle and firmly

press, hold for two seconds and release

the programmed HomeLink button.

Repeat the ⴖ

press/hold/release

ⴖ sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener

(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming.

HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

NOTE:

To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with

⬙

Programming

⬙

step two. Do not repeat step one

. For questions or comments, please contact

HomeLink at

www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515

.


Canadian Programming/Gate Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to

⬙ time-out

⬙

(or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for

HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.

Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to

⬙ time-out

⬙ in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the

⬙

Programming

⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live),

replace

ⴖ

Programming HomeLink

ⴖ

step 3

with the following:

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the

⬙ cycling

⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you

press and release every two seconds

(

⬙ cycle

⬙

) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with

⬙

Programming

⬙ step four to complete.

Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed

HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-

3515

.

Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be

⬙ reprogrammed

⬙

note below), follow the step noted:

•

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.

Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with

⬙

Programming

⬙

- step 2.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button

To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button.

Do

NOT

release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.

Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with

⬙

Programming

⬙ step 2

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:

www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515

.


Security

Garage Door Opener Operation with Security

Alarm (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the Security Alarm feature, the operation of the HomeLink feature will be purposely inhibited if the Security Alarm is

⬙

Armed

⬙

.

This prevents HomeLink operation due to un-authorized vehicle entry. HomeLink operation will be re-stored when the Security Alarm has been

⬙

Disarmed

⬙

.

3

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.

To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold down both outside buttons until the 2 dots below House

Symbol begin to flash (about 20 seconds).


RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.


•

This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


HomeLink

威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,

Inc.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof control is located between the sun visors on the overhead console.

Pressing the

⬙ open

⬙ end of the rocker switch once moves the panel to a comfort stop position short of full opening.

Pressing and holding the switch causes the panel to continue moving rearward, up to the full-open position.

To close the panel, the

⬙ close

⬙ end of the switch must be pressed and held.

Pressing the “vent” button from a fully closed position, raises the trailing edge of the panel for ventilation. When the panel is venting, pressing the “close” end or the rocker switch returns it to the closed position. Both opening and closing operations in the vent mode occur only while the switch is held.

NOTE:

The sunroof will continue to operate for ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until the driver door is opened. This feature may be disabled by your authorized dealer.

Express Open Feature

During the Express Open operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.

To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open

condition until the switch is pushed forward again. To close fully, hold the switch in the forward position until the glass movement has stopped.

The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.

WARNING!

Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.


WARNING!

In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too.

Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.

Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

3


the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

This vehicle has three auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters.

The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use. As a safety precaution, the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch

ON. When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used, it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use.

To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position.

There are two additional 12 V/(20 total Amps for both outlets) power outlets, one located in the storage bin of the center console and another located in the right rear cargo area. These outlets can be reconfigured by the customer to operate only when the ignition is ON

(switched battery fed) or with the ignition ON or OFF

(battery fed) to allow for cellular telephone charging and or operation while the ignition is off.

NOTE:

All accessories connected to these outlets should be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge (unless the customer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery feed).

Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF (Battery

Fed Configuration)

CAUTION!

•

Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting.

•

Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.

•

After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.


Reconfiguring Power Outlets

To reconfigure the outlets, be sure the ignition is OFF before removing the fuse. The reconfigurable fuse location is a special design that allows the fuse to be installed in two different ways. If the fuse is located in the

⬙

Upper or Top Position

⬙ the outlets will work at all times. If the fuse is located in the

⬙

Lower or Bottom Position

⬙ the power outlets will only work when the ignition is ON.

3


NOTE:

The fuse block is located in the left side kick panel behind a removable cover near the park brake pedal. A fuse puller is attached to the inside surface of the fuse panel cover to aid in removing fuses, if necessary.

FLOOR CONSOLE

Floor Console Features

The Floor Console between the driver’s and front passenger’s seat, has the following features:

•

Miscellaneous storage compartments

•

Flexible cup holder inserts

•

Portable phone storage bin

•

Portable phone cord routing between lid and base on forward edge

•

12 Volt reconfigurable power outlet inside storage compartment (See page 171 for more information.)

•

Side open armrest lid

•

Tissue holder & pen holder

•

Coin slots

•

Removable CD bin

The coin slots are located under the instrument panel center stack.

Cup Holders

The Durango has 8 cupholders. Four are located in the center console, two are located in the second row armrest, and two are located in the left hand quarter panel for


third row occupants. The four cupholders located in the center console may be removed for cleaning.

Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage

The console is equipped with a power outlet, portable phone storage bin, and phone cord routing. The phone storage bin can be used when easy access to the phone is needed. Also, the power outlet inside the console compartment can be used to power up the phone while it is being stored in the bin. To use, plug in the portable power recharge cord and place the cord along the opening under the forward portion of the storage bin. Close the console armrest lid and plug the power cord into the phone while resting the phone in the bin. The power outlet may be used for any portable item with a standard

12 volt power outlet adaptor, requiring up to 20 Amps of current.

3


FACTORY INSTALLED ROOF LUGGAGE RACK

NOTE:

Crossbars are offered by Mopar

威 accessories.

External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 68 kg (150 lbs.), and should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.

The side rails between the stantions should be used to tie down cargo. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.

Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.

Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load.

Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.

Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.


WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.

3


CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM—IF EQUIPPED

The cargo management system consists of a removable cargo liner and removable cargo organizer.

To remove the organizer from the vehicle, pull the right hand side of the organizer towards you so that the right pin slides out of the slot in the vehicle. Push the organizer to the right and lift out of the vehicle.

Cargo Organizer

To open the side cover, pull on the cover latch. To open the organizer base pull on the center latch.

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS

CONTENTS

䡵

Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

䡵

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

䡵

Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

䡵

Radio Reception Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

▫

AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

▫

FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

䡵

Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

▫

Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

䡵

Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)

Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And

Hands Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

▫

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 193

▫

Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 197

▫

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 199

▫

Operating Instructions - Hands Free

Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

▫

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

4

178 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS

䡵

Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio

With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone,

And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES)

Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

▫

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 201

▫

Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For

CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

▫

Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For

CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

▫

Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

▫

Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For

MP3 Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

▫

Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 212

䡵

Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc)

Radio With Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

▫

Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio

(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

▫

Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

䡵

Video Entertainment System

(Sales Code XRV) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

䡵

Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

▫

System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

▫

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

▫

Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ, And

RAK Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

▫

Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

▫

Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 218

▫

Using The PTY (Program Type) Button

(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

▫

PTY Button

⬙

Scan

⬙

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

▫

PTY Button

⬙

Seek

⬙

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

▫

Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

▫

Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

䡵

Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 220

▫

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

▫

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

䡵

Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

䡵

Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 222

䡵

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

▫

Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

▫

Air Conditioning Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

▫

Front Blower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 179

▫

Front Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

▫

Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped . . . . 226

▫

Rear Window Defrosting And Rear Window

Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

▫

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

▫

Automatic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

▫

Level Of Automatic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

▫

Manual Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

▫

Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped . . . 232

▫

Rear Rotary Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . 233

▫

Front Unit To Rear Unit Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

▫

Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

▫

Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

4


䡵

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

▫

Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

▫

Rear Window Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS


4


Instrument Cluster

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION

1. Fuel Gage

The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position.

2. Temperature Gage

The temperature gage indicates engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gage needle in V6 and V8 engines will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or when towing a trailer. If the needle rises to the “H” mark, stop the vehicle, shift into N (Neutral) increase engine speed for 2-3 minutes. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, seek authorized service immediately.


CAUTION!

Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator if the engine overheats.

The gage pointer will remain near its last reading when the engine is turned off. It will return to a true reading when the engine is restarted.

4

3. Turn Signal Indicators

When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal, check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the


left/right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM vehicle speed greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more than one mile.

4. Low Fuel Warning Light

This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1/8 of a tank or less.

5. High Beam Indicator

Indicates that headlights are on high beam.

6. Seat Belt Reminder Light

This light comes on for several seconds after the ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled. If this light flashes, it indicates a fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

7. Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This light shows when the fog lights are ON.

8. Coolant Temperature Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. For a bulb check, this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shift into N

(Neutral) and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3 minutes. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, seek authorized service immediately.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until the light turns off. If the if the light remains on, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure

Cap paragraph.


9. Speedometer

Shows the vehicles speed.

10. Voltage Light

This light monitors the electrical system voltage.

The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.

Immediate service should be obtained.

4

11. Liftgate Open

The Gate Open light will illuminate when the liftgate is not properly closed.

12. Security Light

This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set.

The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on.


13. ABS Warning Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System which is described elsewhere in this manual.

This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for approximately 3 seconds. If this light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. See your authorized dealer immediately. With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also switched off. Both malfunction indicator lights illuminate with the engine running. If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator light illuminates and the ABS is switched off. When the voltage is above this value again, the malfunction indicator light should go out and the ABS is operational. If the malfunction indicator light stays illuminated, have the system checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

14. Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light

This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has become too low. For a bulb check, this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Immediate service should be obtained.

15. Tachometer

This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute

(rpm x 1000).

16. Gear Selector

The electronic gear selector display is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of each position to all other positions. For a good signal the display will place a box around the selected transmission

range (PRND21). If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 (no boxes) have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

17. Trip Odometer

The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer, press the Odometer/Trip Odometer Button. To reset the

Trip Odometer, press and hold the button while in trip mode, until the Trip Odometer resets.

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,

GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the GASCAP message off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.


18. Odometer

The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined.

4

19. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light

— If Equipped

The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedometer area illuminates with the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. The

⬙


⬙ starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The


⬙


⬙ also flashes when TCS is active. If the

⬙


⬙ begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The “ESP/

TCS Indicator Light” becomes illuminated when the

ESP-Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially available caused by lack of engine management or brake thermal model.

20. Transmission Temperature Indicator

This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEU-

TRAL until the light goes off.

21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running. If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable, however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

22. Door Ajar

The Door Ajar light will illuminate when any door is open.

NOTE:

A chime will sound if the vehicle is rolling and a door has been opened.

23. BRAKE System Warning Light

The red “BRAKE” warning light will come on when the ignition key is first turned on, and stay on briefly as a bulb check. If the bulb does not come on during starting, have the bulb repaired promptly. If the light stays on, it may be an indication that the parking brake has not been released, or there is a low brake fluid level. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster.

In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake

Booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake.

If the parking brake is applied, the light will flash when the gear position is out of park for automatic transmissions.


If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. Operating the vehicle in this condition is dangerous!

24. Low Washer Fluid Indicator

This light comes on when the washer fluid level falls below approximately 1/4 full. The light will remain on until fluid is added and ignition switch is cycled.

4

25. ESP/BAS Warning Lamp – If Equipped

The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning

Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

They should go out with the engine running. If the

“ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been


driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

NOTE:

• ⬙

The

⬙


⬙ and the

⬙

ESP/

BAS Warning Lamp

⬙ come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

•

The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively operating.

26. Malfunction Indicator Light

This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system which monitors the emissions and engine control system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 10 seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come on during starting, have the condition investigated promptly.

If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service.

Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability.

If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

27. Airbag Indicator

The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition is first turned ON. If the light does not come on when the ignition is first turned on, or the light stays on or comes on while driving, have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer.

28. 4LO Indicator

Indicates when transfer case is in 4LO position.

29. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator

The SVC 4WD lights will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and will stay on for 2 seconds. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

30. Cruise Light (Speed Control)

This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on.


31. TOW/HAUL

The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/

HAUL button has been selected.

32. 4LOCK Indicator

Indicates transfer case is in 4LOCK position.

33. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button

Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading.

4

RADIO RECEPTION INFORMATION

AM Reception

AM radio signals usually travel longer distances than FM signals, especially at night. These longer distance AM signals can cause AM stations to interfere with one


another. Noise from storms and power lines can also interfere with AM reception. Reducing the treble can reduce some of the noise.

FM Reception

FM Stereo signals produce better sound quality than AM signals. However, FM signals will only travel approximately 10 to 40 miles (16 to 64 km). Tall structures or hills can cause interference with FM signals causing the sound to cut out.

ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK

The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is accurately maintained.

On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio only one of the two, time or frequency is displayed.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /

Audio control.

3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune

/ Audio control to set the minutes.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio control.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately

5 seconds.

SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)

RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND

HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY

NOTE:

The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate.

REF Radio


Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.

4

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

For your convenience, the volume can be turned down, but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON.


Mode Button (Radio Mode)

Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the

CD player or Satellite Radio (if equipped).

SEEK Button (Radio Mode)

Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

MUTE Button (Radio Mode)

Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers.

⬙

MUTE

⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF, or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE feature.

NOTE:

In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the

MUTE button mutes the microphone.

SCAN Button (Radio Mode)

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.

PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)

Pressing the PSCAN button, causes the tuner to scan through preset stations, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press PSCAN a second time.

Time Button

Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds.



2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/

Audio control.

3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side

Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio control.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.

RW/FF (Radio Mode)

Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.


TUNE Control (Radio Mode)

Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.

AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)

Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones.

4

Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.

Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.


Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The

Push-Button Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.

The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push-button memory.

You may add a second station to each push-button by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12 FM and

12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push-button twice.

Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed.

Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)

These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12

Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

Operation Instructions - CD Mode

NOTE:


Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display.

If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play. The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.

NOTE:

•

On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF.


•

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD

Player.

•

This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.

SEEK Button (CD Mode)

Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.

4

MUTE Button (CD Mode)


⬙

MUTE

⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.


SCAN Button (CD Mode)

Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.

To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.

EJECT Button (CD Mode)

Press this button and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the last selected mode.

If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.

TIME Button (CD Mode)

Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day. The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds.

RW/FF (CD Mode)

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW

(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD

Mode)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random

Play.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an

MP3 player, cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5

mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.

NOTE:

The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK position to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the radio was previously in the AUX mode.

SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

No function.


MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)


⬙

MUTE

⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.

SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)

EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds.

4


RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)


CD player or Satellite Radio (if equipped).

Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If

Equipped

Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™) section of the Owner’s Manual.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If

Equipped

Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s

Manual.

SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO

WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS

FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT

SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES

NOTE:

The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate.

RAQ Radio

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

NOTE:


Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

For your convenience, the volume can be turned down, but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON.


Mode Button (Radio Mode)


CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment

System (VES) (if equipped).

SEEK Button (Radio Mode)

Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

4

MUTE Button (Radio Mode)


⬙

MUTE

⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers


will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers

NOTE:

In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the

MUTE button mutes the microphone.

SCAN Button (Radio Mode)

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.

MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)

Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio

Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

Time Button

Press the time button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds.



2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /

Audio control.

3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune

/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio control.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.

RW/FF (Radio Mode)

Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

TUNE Control (Radio Mode)

Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.

AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)

Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.

Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones.

Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.


Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.

Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL-

ANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

4

Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone, balance and fade.

RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)

Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for

5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or


turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.

Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types:

Program Type

16 Digit-Character

Display

No program type or undefined

Adult Hits

Alert Alert

Classical

Classic Rock

College

Country

Emergency Test

Foreign Language

Information

None

Adult_Hits

Alert Alert

Classical

Classic_Rock

College

Country

Emergency Test

Foreign_Language

Information

Jazz

News

Nostalgia

Oldies

Personality

Public

Rhythm and Blues

Religious Music

Religious Talk

Rock

Soft

Soft Rock

Soft Rhythm and Blues

Sports

Talk

Top 40

Weather

Jazz

News

Nostalgia

Oldies

Personality

Public

Rhythm_and_Blues

Religious_Music

Religious_Talk

Rock

Soft

Soft_Rock

Soft_R_&_B

Sports

Talk

Top_40

Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program

Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the

Push-Button Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push-button memory.


You may add a second station to each push-button by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12

FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push-button twice.

4

Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed.

Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)

These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12

Satellite (if equipped) stations}.


Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio

Play)

NOTE:


NOTE:

Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display.

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the disc number, the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.

MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)


⬙

MUTE

⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.

SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the

CD currently playing.


LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio

Play)

LOAD/ EJECT - Load

Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display

PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT

DISC. After the radio displays

⬙

LOAD DISC

⬙ insert the

CD into the player.

Radio display will show

⬙

LOADING DISC

⬙ when the disc is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is reading the disc.

4

LOAD / EJT - Eject

Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal.



⬙

EJECTING DISC

⬙ when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio, the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.

If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display

⬙

INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be displayed.

On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,

Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.

AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.

RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD

MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random

Play.

Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.


Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.

4

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

•

Maximum number of directory levels: 15


•

Maximum number of files: 255

•

Maximum number of folders: 100

•

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

•

Level 1: 12 (including a separator

⬙

.

⬙ and a

3-character extension)

•

Level 2: 31 (including a separator

⬙

.

⬙ and a

3-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

Discs created with an option such as

⬙ keep disc open after writing

⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification

Sampling Frequency (kHz)

Bit rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

24, 22.05, 16

320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,

16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.


Playback of MP3 Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

•

Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

•

Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs

•

Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

4

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc.


Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio

Play)

SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next

MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file.

LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

LOAD/ EJECT - Load

Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display

PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT

DISC. After the radio displays

⬙

LOAD DISC

⬙ insert the

CD into the player.


⬙

LOADING DISC

⬙ when the disc is loading.

LOAD / EJECT - Eject

Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal.


⬙

EJECTING DISC

⬙ when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio, the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.

If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display

⬙

INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode.

MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.

The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:

Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to

⬙ elapsed time

⬙ priority mode.

Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file.

RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection.

TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of

Tone, Balance, and Fade.


AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Switches back to Radio mode.

RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing this button plays files randomly.

SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.

Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders. Press the TUNE control to select a folder.

4

Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.


Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If

Equipped)

Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s

Manual.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If

Equipped)

Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s

Manual.

Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment

System (VES

威

) (If Equipped)

Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES

威

)

Guide.

SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

REC Radio

Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3

Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning

System-based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection

menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD changer with MP3 capability.

Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a

DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s

Manual” for detailed operating instructions.

Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If

Equipped)

Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instructions.


Refer to “Setting the Clock” under ”System Settings” in your Navigation User’s Manual for details about setting the clock.


VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE

XRV) — IF EQUIPPED

The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display) screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headsets. The system is located in the headliner behind the front row seat. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for detailed operating instructions.

4

SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED

Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.


System Activation

NOTE:

Your vehicle’s radio must be on and in satellite mode when the activation process takes place.

To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID).

2. Credit card information.

3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID)

The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access With REF Radios

With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.

Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve

ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits are displayed.

The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed.

ESN/SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios

With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed.

ESN/SID Access With REC Navigation Radios

Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.

With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simultaneously until the 12 digits of the ESN/SID appear on the screen.


Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK

Radios

Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio

Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word

⬙

SAT

⬙ appears in the display.

A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

4

Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio

Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word

⬙

SAT

⬙ appears in the display.

These radios will also display the current station name and program type. For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.

A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the

Satellite radio mode.


Selecting a Channel

Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the

TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released.

Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel. The word

⬙

SCAN

⬙ will appear in the display between each channel change. Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.

NOTE:

Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-

7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.

Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels

In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.

Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if equipped)

Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio.

PTY Button

ⴖ

SCAN

ⴖ

When the desired program type is obtained, press the

⬙

SCAN

⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type. Press the

⬙

SCAN

⬙ button a second time to stop the search.

NOTE:

Pressing the

⬙

SEEK

⬙ or

⬙

SCAN

⬙ button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by

one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory button during a music type scan, will call up the memory channel and stop the search.

PTY Button

ⴖ

SEEK

ⴖ

When the desired program is obtained, press the

⬙

SEEK

⬙ button within five seconds. The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected.

Satellite Antenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.


Reception Quality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons.

•

The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.

•

Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.

•

Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.

•

Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

4


REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume.

The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD.

The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center. The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode.

Radio Operation

Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.

CD Player

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.

The button in the center of the left hand switch changes

CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This button does not function for all other radios.


COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.

4

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners, or antistatic sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.


NOTE:

If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Manual Control

The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. The following describes its operation:

Air Conditioning Operation

To turn the air conditioning On or Off perform the following steps:

•

Position the mode control button to the desired airflow setting.

•

Set the front blower control to any desired speed.

•

Press the Snowflake (A/C) button which is located to the right of the temperature control slide. An indicator light on the Snowflake (A/C) button shows that the air conditioning is On.

•

Press the Snowflake (A/C) button a second time to turn the air conditioning Off.

NOTE:

The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in


engine speed or power may be noticed when the compressor cycles. This is a normal occurrence since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and improve fuel economy.

Front Blower Control

The Front Blower controls the amount of air delivered to the passenger compartment.

There are four blower speeds.

The fan speed increases as you turn the control clockwise. When the front blower control is turned to OFF, the blower will be turned off and the system will be positioned in recirculation mode.

4


Front Mode Control

The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution.

NOTE:

To improve your selection choices, the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots and give an even blend of both modes.

Recirculation Mode (Panel or Bi-Level)

Select either the Panel or Bi-Level mode positions when the outside air contains smoke, odors, high humidity, or if rapid cooling of the interior is desired. This feature allows for recirculation of interior air only, when either of these positions are selected. Air flows through the panel outlets or panel and floor outlets in these modes.

Panel

Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow.

Bi-Level

Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor.

NOTE:

There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Heat (Floor)

Outside air flows primarily through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel. A small amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix

Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlet.


Defrost

Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlet located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets.

NOTE:

The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield.

4


Temperature Control

The temperature of the air is controlled by a slide located on the top center of the control panel. Move the slide left or right to change the temperature. The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped

Rotating this knob left to the

“REAR CONTROL” position allows the passengers in the second and third row seats to control the blower speed and temperature by means of the rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as described under “Rear Zone

Control.” Rotating this knob to the “OFF” position, turns off the rear climate controls.

Rotating this knob to the right of the “OFF” position allows the Driver and front passenger to control the rear blower speed, and the rear temperature using the front temperature slide. The mode, front or rear, is always controlled by the front mode control. For example: Panel


mode on the front control will give you air from the outlets in the headliner in the rear. Floor mode in the front will give you floor in the rear.

Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window

Washer/Wiper

See the “Rear Window Features” section of this book.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Equipped

The control can be turned on by pressing the POWER button. When the control is turned on, it will be in the last mode prior to being turned off. Pressing the POWER button again will turn off the control. The control can also be turned on by pressing any button and it will display the corresponding operating mode for that button.

Automatic Control

The ATC system can maintain a steady comfort level in various weather conditions with a simple operation:

•

Select your desired temperature setting by pressing the + or – side of the TEMP rocker switch.

4


The ATC system uses an infrared sensor located in the overhead console to measure the temperature of the driver. Based on the sensor input, the system will automatically control comfort by varying the temperature, fan speed, and mode. This maintains a comfortable temperature, even under changing conditions. It is important that the infrared sensor is kept clean and that objects are not blocking the sensor. It is also important that objects are not used that may scratch or damage it in any way.

Level Of Automatic Control

72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person, however, this may vary.

NOTE:

The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation. It is not necessary to move the temperature setting for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.

NOTE:

In cold weather, the fan will not turn on in

AUTO mode until the engine coolant has warmed up sufficiently. This is indicated by the WARM UP DELAY message on the display.

NOTE:

The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or

Metric by selecting the US/M customer programmable feature. Refer to the

⬙

Overhead Console-Customer Programmable Features.

⬙

The mode will also be shown in the display and will change as required during automatic operation.

NOTE:

The system can be put into recirculate mode without affecting ATC operation. This will prevent outside air from entering the vehicle. Use this mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust.

Manual Control (ATC)

You also may choose to customize your comfort by selecting the fan speed and mode manually. Pressing the fan speed button or any mode button places the system into manual operation.

While in manual operation there are six fan speeds available and the choice of any mode. The airflow temperature is adjusted automatically to maintain the desired comfort level. You can adjust the temperature by pressing the + or – TEMP rocker switch.

FAN Control

Use this button to regulate the amount of air delivered through the system in any mode you select.

Press the + or – side of the button to increase or decrease fan speed.

Air Conditioning Operation

Press this button to turn on the air conditioning compressor. A snow flake symbol in the display


shows that the compressor is on. Compressor operation is automatic when you press the AUTO button and no snowflake is shown.

The compressor may operate at any temperature above

32°F (0°C).

NOTE:

The compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the compressor cycles. This is a normal occurrence since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and improve fuel economy.

4

Recirculate Button

Press this button to recirculate the air inside the vehicle. Outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle. Use this mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, dust or when rapid cooling of the interior is required.


Manual control of Recirculation is possible only in Panel,

Floor, and Bi-Level modes. It will not operate in Mix, or

Defrost modes. The recirculation symbol will flash three times indicating recirculation is not available in these modes.

NOTE:

If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press the recirculate button to return to outside air. Some conditions will cause captured interior air to fog windows when in recirculate mode.

Panel

Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow.

Floor (Heat)

Outside air flows primarily through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel. A small amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix

Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlets.

Bi-Level

Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor.

NOTE:

There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Defrost

Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlets located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets.

NOTE:

The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if

the A/C snowflake button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield.

Rear Temperature Control (ATC)

The “REAR” button cycles through the following modes:

Rear Control from Front

This allows the driver or passenger to control the rear blower speeds using the FAN +/– rocker switch and the rear temperature using the TEMP +/– rocker switch.

While in this mode, pressing the POWER button will turn the rear system off. Pressing the POWER, TEMP or FAN buttons will turn the rear system back on.

NOTE:

The display will show a “REAR” fan speed graph and a “REAR” temperature graph.

CONTROL IN REAR

This allows the passengers in the second row seats to control the blower speed and temperature by means of


the rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as described under the

⬙

Rear Zone Climate

Control.

⬙

NOTE:

The display will show “CONTROL IN REAR.”

REAR OFF

This turns the rear system off. The control will return to the front system display after approximately 5 seconds if no buttons are pushed while in one of the rear system displays. You may also return to the front system display sooner by pushing any button except the POWER, REAR,

TEMP or FAN buttons.

4

NOTE:

The display will show “REAR OFF.”

Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window

Washer/Wiper

See the “Rear Window Features” section of this book.


Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped

Headliner air comes from the outlets in the headliner.

Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vane knobs on the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.

The rear compartment control uses two rotary knobs: one for the temperature control and the other for the fan speed control. The mode for the rear air conditioning and heating system is always controlled by the front control unit. Fan and temperature can be controlled from the front control unit or the rear control unit.

Rear Rotary Blower Control

The second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed, only when the front control unit is in the

“REAR CONTROL” position or CONTROL IN REAR

⬙ for ATC.

⬙

The rear blower switch has an “Off” position and a range of blower speeds. Rotating the rear blower control clockwise will increase the blower speed.

Rear Rotary Temperature Control

The second row seat occupants have control of the rear temperature control, only when the front control unit is in the “REAR CONTROL” position.

To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, rotate the temperature control knob to the right or left.

The blue area indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.


NOTE:

For best operation, make sure that ventilation grilles located in the rear storage area are not obstructed by stowed articles.

4


Front Unit to Rear Unit Chart

If the Front Control is selected

Panel

Rear Airflow will come from

Headliner

Bi-Level Headliner

•

Between Bi-Level Floor Bi-Level

Floor Floor

Mix

Defrost

Floor

Floor

Operating Tips

Fast Cooldown

For a fast cooldown, set the blower fan to the highest setting, set the mode control to the panel fresh position, press the snowflake button to turn on the air conditioning, and drive with the windows open for the first few minutes. Once the hot air has been expelled, close the windows and set the mode selector to the Recirculation panel or Recirculation Bi-level position. When a comfortable condition has been reached, choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control and blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort. For high humidity conditions it may be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to maintain comfort.

Window Fogging

Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.

As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode position on the control. Adjust the temperature control

and blower speed to maintain comfort. Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode.

Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.

Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.

Summer Operation

Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 % concentration is recommended.


When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear.

When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL and press the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation.

Winter Operation

When operating the system during the winter months, make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.

4


Operating Tips Chart

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer


A rotating switch located on the climate control panel turns the rear wiper On or Off. Pressing the rotating switch inward activates the rear window washer. Rotating the switch will enable one of five intermittent delay times for the rear wiper. The delay times range from 20 to 1 second.

4


If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will resume operation.

Rear Window Defrosting

A push-button type switch is located in the climate control panel. Press the switch and the rear window defroster and electric remote control heated mirrors

(if equipped) will turn On. An amber indicator on the push-button will light when the defroster is turned On.

An symbol will be displayed when the defroster is turned on with an ATC control. Push again to turn Off prior to time-out. The defroster will automatically turn Off after fifteen minutes. For ten more minutes of operation, push the button again. To prevent excessive battery drain, use the defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Also, keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

䡵

Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

▫

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

▫

Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

▫

Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 244

䡵

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

▫


䡵

Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

▫

NV 144 Transfer Case Operating

Information/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

▫

Shifting Procedure - NV 144 Transfer Case . . . 252

▫

NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating

Information / Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

▫

Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

䡵

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

䡵

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

▫

Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . 260

䡵

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

䡵

Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

5

240 STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

▫

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

▫

Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 268

▫

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 269

䡵

Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

▫

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

▫

Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

▫

Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

▫

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 277

▫

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 278

▫

Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

▫

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

▫

Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫

Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

▫

Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

䡵

Supplemental Tire Pressure Information – If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

䡵

Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

䡵

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

䡵

Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

䡵

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

▫

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

▫

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

▫

MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

▫

Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

▫

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

▫

Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

▫

Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

䡵

Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

䡵

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

▫

Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

▫

Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

▫

Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

䡵

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

▫

Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

▫

Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

▫

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

STARTING AND OPERATING 241

▫

Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

▫

Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

▫

Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

▫

Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . 307

䡵

Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

▫

Dodge Durango Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

䡵

Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 308

▫

Recreational Towing 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . 308

▫

Recreational Towing 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . 308

䡵

Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

䡵

Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

5


STARTING PROCEDURES

Automatic Transmission

Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or

PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.

See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully.

Normal Starting

Normal Starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.

Tip Start Feature

Your vehicle has a “Tip Start” starting system. With “Tip

Start” the driver does not need to hold the key in the

’Start’ position until the vehicle starts, but can release the key (still in the ignition) and the vehicle will continue through the start cycle.

•

Turn the ignition key to the START position, until the start motor engages.

•

Release the key (still in the ignition) and the starter will continue through the start cycle until the vehicle starts or for 5 seconds (whichever comes first).

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

Normal Starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.


If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated.

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.

5

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to

15 seconds before trying again.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly.

After Starting

The idle speed is automatically controlled on fuel injected engines and will decrease as the engine warms up.


CAUTION!

Long periods of engine idling can cause excessive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running.

WARNING!

Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death.

Engine Block Heater — If Equipped

The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three wire extension cord.

The 3.7L/4.7L engine block heater cord is located at the front of the engine compartment near the radiator cap.

The 5.7L engine block heater cord is located on the left side of the engine compartment and rearward of the power distribution center.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.

Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION


The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear selected. The selector lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column. To drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the desired drive position. Pull selector lever toward you when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or when shifting out of Park.

Brake/Transmission Interlock System

This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed. This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Always depress the

brake pedal first,

before moving the gear selector out of PARK.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or

Neutral position into another gear range.


“P” Park

Supplements parking brake by locking the transmission.

Engine can be started in this range. Never use Park while vehicle is in motion. Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first, then place selector in Park position.

WARNING!

Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to move the gearshift lever back and forth without first pulling the lever toward you, after you have set it in

P (Park). Make sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.

5


WARNING!

Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

WARNING!

It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or

“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

“R” Reverse

Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

“N” Neutral

Shift to Neutral when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle.

NOTE:

Towing the vehicle (except as specified under

Towing A Disabled Vehicle), coasting, or otherwise driving the vehicle while in N (Neutral) can cause severe transmission damage

“D” Drive

For most city and highway driving.

“2” Second

For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain roads where more precise speed control is desirable. Use

it also when climbing long grades, and for engine braking when descending moderately steep grades. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 miles per hour (72 km/h) in this range.

“1” First

For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at low speeds 25 mph (40 km/h) or less when going down hill. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.

Overdrive Operation

The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed

(Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are present:

• the transmission selector is in Drive;


• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature;

• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48 km/h);

• the “TOW/HAUL” switch has not been activated;

• transmission has reached normal operating temperature.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature. Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch, later in this section.

5


If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After cooldown, the transmission will resume normal operation.

The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).

When To Use “TOW/HAUL” Mode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in “TOW/HAUL” mode, 5th gear (if

equipped) is disabled and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are modified. Shifts into Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed during steady cruise (for improved fuel economy) and automatic closed-throttle downshifts to 3rd gear (for improved braking) will occur during steady braking.

The “TOW/HAUL” light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation. If the “TOW/HAUL” mode is desired, the button must be pressed each time the engine is started.

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included in all automatic transmissions. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear. When


the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in Overdrive and in Drive.

NOTE:

The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm

[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.

Pressing the

⬙

TOW/HAUL

⬙ button will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.

5

NOTE:

If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission. This condition is normal and will not


cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into any other gear position.

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

NV 144 Transfer Case Operating

Information/Precautions

The NV 144 is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the Four-Wheel-Drive (4WD) Control

Switch, which is located on the instrument panel.

The NV 144 transfer case provides 2 mode positions:

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) and 4-Wheel-Drive LOCK.

The NV 144 transfer case is designed to be driven in for

AWD for normal street and highway conditions (all road surfaces roads).

When additional traction is required, the transfer case

4LOCK position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the 4LOCK position

- see Shifting Procedure section for specific shifting instructions. The 4LOCK position is designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster, and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. If there are no indicator lights on or flashing the transfer case position is All-Wheel Drive

(AWD).

The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift

4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the

ⴖ

Service 4WD

ⴖ

light is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury.

NOTE:

Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV 144 transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.

Proper operation of four-wheel-drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case.


Because four-wheel-drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below:

AWD

Normal All-Wheel-Drive High Range - Employs interaxle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds. All road surfaces.

5

4LOCK

Four-Wheel-Drive LOCK - Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.


Shifting Procedure - NV 144 Transfer Case

AWD to 4LOCK or 4LOCK to AWD

With the key ON and the engine either OFF or RUN-

NING, rotate the transfer case switch, located on the instrument panel to the desired position.

NOTE:

Delayed shifting out of 4LOCK may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or excessive vehicle loading.

NOTE:

If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry a selection, turn the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5) seconds, and retry the shift.

NOTE:

The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between

AWD/4LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation the position indicator light will continue to flash. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to 13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning.

NOTE:

The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.

If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating

Information / Precautions

The NV 244 Generation II is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch, which is located on the instrument panel.

The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides 4 mode positions - Normal all-wheel-drive high range, fourwheel-drive LOCK, four-wheel-drive low range, and neutral.

This transfer case is equipped with an inter-axle differential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal all-wheel-drive position (AWD) at all times on any given road surface, including dry hard surfaced roads. The

AWD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds. This eliminates driveline binding and component wear normally associated with driving the


vehicle in the 4LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads. This feature provides the safety, security, and convenience of operating in all-wheel drive at all times regardless of road conditions.

When additional traction is required, the 4LOCK and

4LO positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together through the transfer case inter-axle differential and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the

4WD Control Switch to these positions. The 4LOCK and

4LO positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4LOCK and 4LO positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

5

The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.


NOTE:

The transfer case Neutral (N) position is to be used for recreational towing only. See Recreational Towing section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral (N).

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the instrument cluster. If there are no indicator lights on or flashing the transfer case position is All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection (4HI

⇔

4LOCK).

The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift

4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the

ⴖ

Service 4WD

ⴖ

light is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury.

NOTE:

Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV 244 Generation

II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.

When operating your vehicle in 4LO, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the AWD or 4LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 40 km/h (25 mph).

Proper operation of four-wheel-drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.


WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

5

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below:

AWD

Normal All-Wheel-Drive High Range - Employs interaxle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds. All road surfaces.


4LOCK

Four-Wheel-Drive LOCK - Locks the transfer case interaxle differential. Forces front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4LO

Four-Wheel-Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive. Locks the transfer case inter-axle differential.

Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

N

Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more information.

Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II

Transfer Case

NOTE:

The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between

AWD/ 4LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation a position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain

ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the

wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to

13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning.

NOTE:

Delayed shifting out of the 4LOCK position may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or excessive loading.

NOTE:

When shifting into or out of 4LO some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER

OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:

Preferred Procedure

1. With the engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.


3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position.

4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing, shift the transmission back into gear.

Alternate Procedure

1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.

2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or

RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

5

3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position.

4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing, shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:


If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.


NOTE:

If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry the selection, turn the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5) seconds, and retry the shift.

PARKING BRAKE

The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.

Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear-shift lever is in PARK position. When parking on a hill you should apply the Parking Brake before placing the gear shift lever in PARK; otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of PARK.

NOTE:

The instrument cluster brake warning light indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

The parking brake should be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.


WARNING!

•

Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or vehicle may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in Park. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

•

Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident.

•

Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear selector lever. Don’t leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

5


BRAKE SYSTEM

In the event power assist is lost for any reason, (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly increased over that required with the power system operating.

If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake

Warning Lamp and the ABS Lamp during brake use.

Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.

WARNING!

Significant over or under inflation of tires, or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness.

The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low-speed selftest at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow. This is normal. The Anti-Lock

Brake System pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal.

At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation. Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure results in optimal braking power while maintaining the ability to steer the vehicle. In the case of an emergency brake maneuver, keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this manner only can the ABS be most effective. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pedal pressure because of the increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.


WARNING!

Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.

Installation of such equipment should be done by qualified professionals.

5

WARNING!

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.


WARNING!

•

Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

•

The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

•

The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the Anti-lock Brake system, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system.

Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the system is functioning properly.

POWER STEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.

Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and does not in any way damage the steering system.


WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.

Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Prolong operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.

5


ROCKING THE VEHICLE

If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE, while applying slight pressure to the accelerator.

The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles.

This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

NOTE:

•

P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

•

European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter

⬙

P

⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H

•

LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.


•

Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

•

High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

5


Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Size Designation:

P

= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards ⴖ

....blank....

ⴖ

= Passenger car tire based on European design standards

LT

= Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards

T

= Temporary Spare tire

31

= Overall Diameter in Inches (in)

215

= Section Width in Millimeters (mm)

65

= Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)

—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.

10.5

= Section Width in Inches (in)

R

= Construction Code

—

⬙

R

⬙ means Radial Construction.

—

⬙

D

⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.

15

= Rim Diameter in Inches (in)


EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95

= Load Index

—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.

H

= Speed Symbol

—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions.

—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted speed limits).

Load Identification:

ⴖ

....blank....

ⴖ

= Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire

Extra Load (XL)

= Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire

Light Load

= Light Load Tire

C,D,E

= Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load

— Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.

Maximum Pressure

— Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.

5


Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT

= Department of Transportation

—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use.

MA

=

Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)

L9

=

Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)

ABCD

=

Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)

03

=

Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)

—03 means the 3rd week.

01

=

Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)

—01 means the year 2001.

—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side

“B” pillar.


Tire and Loading Information Placard


Tire and Loading Information

This placard tells you important information about the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle

2) the total weight your vehicle can carry

3) the tire size designed for your vehicle

4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear and spare tires.

5


Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading

Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the

“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.

passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:

The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities


of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:

For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392

Kg).

5


WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:


1. Safety—

WARNING!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents.

•

Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure.

•

Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure.

•

Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.

You could lose control of your vehicle.

•

Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

•

Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

5


2. Economy—

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side “B” pillar.

Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information” section of this manual.


The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.


Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this outside temperature condition.

5

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle


loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine them with other types of tires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.


Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.

5


Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.

Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).

See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section

6 of this manual.


WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point.

5


Life of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

•

Driving style

•

Tire pressure

•

Distance driven

WARNING!

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.

Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.

WARNING!

•

Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

•

Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have an accident.

•

Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.


CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

Alignment And Balance

Poor suspension alignment may result in:

•

Fast tire wear.

•

Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided wear.

•

Vehicle pull to right or left.

5

Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.

Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.


Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.

Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.

SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION

– IF EQUIPPED

A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passengers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.

Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle will be found on the face of the driver’s door.

TIRE CHAINS

Use “Class S” chains on Durango, or other traction aids that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.

NOTE:

Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain manufacturer.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe the following precautions:

•

Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage.

Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use.

•

Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).

•

Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).

•

Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

•

Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles.

•

Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.

•

Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer.

These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.

Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of

Durango trucks.

NOTE:

The use of class “S” chains is permitted on

Durangos with P245/70R17 tires.

CAUTION!

Do not use tire chains on 4x4 Durango trucks equipped with tires other than P245/70R17 tires.

There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle. Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of Durango models. There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle.


SNOW TIRES

Snow tires should be of the same size and type construction as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire. These tires should always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

5


TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”

Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

All engines (except 5.7L engines) are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an oc-

3.7L/4.7L

tane rating of 87. The routine use of pre-

Engines

mium gasoline is not recommended.

Under normal conditions the use of premium fuel will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance.

5.7L Engines

The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance.The routine use


of premium gasoline is not recommended. The use of premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

5

Over 40 auto manufacturers world-wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance


and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”

Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.

Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.

Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasolines containing METHANOL.

Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical fuel system components.

MMT In Gasoline

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolines blended with MMT provide no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance. We recommend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle.

The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains

MMT.

It is even more important to look for gasolines without

MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.


Materials Added To Fuel

All gasolines sold in the United States are required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

ADDING FUEL

NOTE:

If fuel is poured from a portable container, the container should have a flexible nozzle long enough to extend into the fuel filler tube.

5

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.

NOTE:

When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.


NOTE:

Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.

WARNING!

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on a truck bed. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

NOTE:

To avoid contact between fuel cap and paint, hang tether strap over hook provided on inner fuel door.

NOTE:

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a

⬙ clicking

⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap.

If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.

CAUTION!

Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system.

WARNING!

•

Never allow any lit smoking materials near the vehicles while removing the cap or filling the tank.

•

Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running.


Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:

•

The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, damage the emission control system.

•

An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your dealer for service assistance.

•

When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage may result.

•

The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended. Many of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

5


NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

•

Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

•

Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

•

Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, you must keep the engine maintained to assure proper operation and prevent possible damage.

NOTE:



CAUTION!

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.

5

As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass or leaves can come in contact with a hot exhaust system.

A scorching odor may be detected if you continue to run a malfunctioning engine. The odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the


vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

•

Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.

•

Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.

•

Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver’s side door.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture,

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and shows the Month, Day, and

Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo.

The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that

GVWR is not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options, and cargo.


Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires, or wheels).

Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.

5

Tire Size

This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.

Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.


Inflation Pressure (Cold)

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

Loading

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.

The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met.

Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

WARNING!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

A loaded vehicle is shown in the following example. Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR capabilities are exceeded.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten service life.

NOTE: The weights shown in this chart are not the weights for your vehicle. Also, the amount of load added to both the front and rear axles can be computed

STARTING AND OPERATING 295 after the vehicle has been weighed both in its

ⴖ

curb weight

ⴖ

condition, and in its

ⴖ

loaded and ready for operation

ⴖ

condition.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.

5


TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment

(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its

⬙ loaded and ready for operation

⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a driver).

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.


Frontal Area

The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

5

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.


Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing hitch includes a receiver attached to the tow vehicle, plus a removable hitch head and spring bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the trailer frame.

Fifth-Wheel Hitch

A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.

Gooseneck Hitch

The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed.

Trailer Hitch Classification

The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package.

See your dealer for package content.

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.

Class I - Light Duty

Class II - Medium

Duty

Trailer Hitch Classification

Class Max. GTW (Gross Trailer

Wt.)

2,000 lbs (907 kg)

3,500 lbs (1587 kg)

Class III - Heavy Duty

Class IV - Extra

Heavy Duty

Fifth Wheel/

Gooseneck

5,000 lbs (2268 kg)

10,000 lbs (4540 kg)

Greater than 10,000 lbs (4540 kg)

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.


Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight

Ratings)

NOTE:

For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses:

•

http:// www.dodge.com/towing

.

•

http:// www.dodge.ca

(Canada).

Trailer and Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway

severely

side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.

Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.

5


Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

•

The tongue weight of the trailer.

•

The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.

•

The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE:

Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

•

Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle.

•

During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).

Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.


WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.

Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:

Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident.

5

•

When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.


•

Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.

•

Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.

When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in

P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral.

Always, block or

⬙ chock

⬙ the trailer wheels.

•

GCWR must not be exceeded.

•

Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized

(This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).

Towing Requirements — Tires

− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.

− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the

Tires–General Information section of this manual on

Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.

− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General

Information section of this manual on Tread Wear

Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.

− When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

− Do

not

interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.

This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.

− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically


actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.

− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

5


WARNING!

Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident.

Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE:

Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.

Refer to the following illustrations.

4 - Pin Connector

7- Pin Connector

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.


If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage.

Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission

The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “TOW

HAUL” or “OD/OFF” range should be selected.

NOTE:

Using the “TOW HAUL” or “OD/OFF” range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.

This action will also provide better engine braking.

5

The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than

45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals.


NOTE:

Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing.

Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped)

To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, turn the “TOW HAUL OD/OFF” feature ON when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades.

Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If

Equipped)

− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

− When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.

− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

Towing Tips — Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

− City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed.

− Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

− Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

− refer to Cooling System Operating information in the

Maintenance section of this manual for more information.

Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or

In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main mirror surface.

SNOWPLOW

Dodge Durango Models

NOTE:

Do not use Dodge Durango Models for snowplow applications.


WARNING!

Snowplows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end or your vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can cause damage to the vehicle.

5


WARNING!

Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in an accident. Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Recreational Towing 2WD Models

Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable.

Towing the vehicle with the transmission in Neutral can cause severe transmission damage. Removal of the driveshaft for towing is not recommended since this allows transmission fluid to leak out.

Recreational Towing 4WD Models

CAUTION!

Vehicles equipped with an NV 144 Transfer Case

(which has no neutral position) may NOT be used for recreational towing.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing.


NOTE:

The NV 244 Generation II transfer case must be shifted into Neutral (N) for recreational towing. The

Neutral (N) selection button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case Neutral (N) can take place with the selector switch in any mode position.

Shifting into Neutral (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.

5

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.


2. Shut engine OFF.

3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine.

4. Depress brake pedal.

5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N).

6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for

4 seconds.

7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light comes on release Neutral (N) button.

8. Start engine.

9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).

10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.

11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive

(D).

12. Turn ignition key to the unlocked OFF position.

13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P).

14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.

NOTE:

Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button, and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elaspes and the shift has been completed.

If any of these requirements (with the exception of 3 - Key

ON) are not met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral

(N) button is released.

NOTE:


If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is

OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P)

Shifting OUT of Neutral (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.

1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Shut engine OFF.


3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine.

4. Depress brake pedal.

5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N).

6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for

1 second.

7. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release the Neutral (N) button.

5

8. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch.

9. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P).

10. Start the engine.

11. Shift automatic transmission into Drive (D).


NOTE:

Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button, and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and the shift has been completed.

If any of these requirements are not met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met during the 1 second time, then all of the position indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released.

NOTE:


If the key is not On, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

NOTE:

Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

CAUTION!

•

Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.

•

Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage internal parts.

TRACTION

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy.

2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.

3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.

4. Keep tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE

The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood inner surface.

The following information about your vehicle is displayed on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identification Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers with descriptions of all production and special equipment on the truck as shipped from the factory.

NOTE:

Always refer to the equipment identification plate when ordering parts.


5

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

䡵

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

䡵

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

䡵

Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

▫

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

▫

Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

▫

Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

䡵

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

䡵

Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 327

䡵

Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

▫

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

▫

Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

6

316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

The flasher switch is on the top of the steering column, just behind the steering wheel. Press the flasher switch and all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently.

Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.

ADDING FUEL

If using a portable fuel container, it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to reach past the restriction in the fuel filler tube.

WARNING!

•

Never allow any lit smoking materials near the vehicles while removing the cap or filling the tank.

•

Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running.

•

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is in a vehicle or on a truck bed. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

Jack Location

In the Durango, the scissor jack and tire changing tools are stowed under the second row seat.

The jack is secured in place with a winged stud and a fixed stud. It is very important to secure the jack tightly in place by engaging the slot in the base to the fixed stud under the middle seat. The winged stud inserts through the eyelet in the end of the jack’s worm screw.

6


WARNING!

The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only.

The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes, unless suitable supports are placed under the vehicle as a safety measure. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.


Removing The Spare Tire

The spare tire on the Dodge Durango is located underneath the vehicle in the rear.

Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.

1. Remove the rubber plug from the floor in the cargo area.

2. Engage the jack wrench extension to the spare tire winch through the hole in the floor.

3. Turn the wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire. Continue to turn the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.

6


It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose cable.

Tire Changing Procedure

CAUTION!

The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

WARNING!

Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The scissor jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only. It is not recommended that the jack be used for service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.

Preparations

Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in PARK (automatic transmission). On Four

Wheel Drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L” position.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

•

Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.


•

Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.

•

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

Instructions

1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.

6

2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of the frame


(prior to inboard transition. Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench - the tube extension, may be used but is not required.

the tire as posssible with the drive tubes extending to the rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

Front Jacking Location

When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to

Rear Left Jacking Location

Rear Right Jacking Location

Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required.

4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.


WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.

NOTE:

Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.

6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 135 ± 10 ft.

lbs. (183 ± 14 N·m) dynamic torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.

6


WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle.

Always stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided.

7. Remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.

8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.

9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.

NOTE:

Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

•

Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.

•

Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.

•

Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.

•

Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.

•

Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.

•

Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.

•

Only use the jack in the positions indicated.

•

If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.

•

To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the value stem facing the ground.


To Stow The Flat Or Spare

Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening.

For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.

Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click

2 times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place.

JUMP STARTING

•

of water.

WARNING!

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area immediately with large quantities

•

A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.

6


Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a light or bright colored dot is visible in the indicator (if equipped),

DO NOT jump-start the battery.

If the indicator (if equipped) is dark or shows a green dot, proceed as follows:

1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact.

2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition

OFF on both vehicles.

3. Turn OFF heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical loads.

4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.

WARNING!

Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good contact on the engine.

WARNING!

Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode.

During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode. The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start.

6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.


WARNING!

Any procedure other than above could result in:

1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent;

2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion;

3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.

6


WARNING!

Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.

WARNING!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing serious injury.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recommended.

Attach towing device to main structural members of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles

The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels

OFF

the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) and the distance must not exceed 15 miles (25 km).


If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km ) or faster than 30 mph, it must be towed on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground, or with the front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly.

NOTE:

Towing the vehicle, with the rear wheels on the ground, at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than

15 miles (25 km ) can cause severe transmission damage.

6

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵

Engine Compartment 3.7L V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

䡵

Engine Compartment 4.7L V-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

䡵

Engine Compartment 5.7L HEMI V-8 . . . . . . . . . 336

䡵

Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 337

▫

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

䡵

Emissions Inspection And Maintenance

Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

䡵

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

䡵

Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

䡵

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

▫

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

▫

Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

▫

Drive Belts — Check Condition And

Tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

▫

Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

▫

Ignition Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

▫

Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

▫

Engine Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

7

332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫

Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

▫

Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

▫

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

▫

Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

▫

Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

▫

Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints . . . . . . . . 351

▫

Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

▫

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

▫

Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

▫

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

▫

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

▫

Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

▫

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

▫


▫

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

▫

Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

▫

Selection Of Lubricating Grease . . . . . . . . . . . 365

▫

Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

䡵

Power Distribution Center (Fuse/Relay) . . . . . . . 370

䡵

Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

▫

Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

▫

Underhood Fuses

(Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

▫

Underhood Fuses

(Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

䡵

Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

䡵

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

▫

Headlights/Parking/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . 377

▫

Rear Side Marker, Tail Lights, Turn Signals

And Backup Lights — Replacement . . . . . . . . 378

▫

License Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

▫

Center High-Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . 383

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333

▫

Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

䡵

Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

䡵

Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 386

▫

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

▫

Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

7


ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.7L V6

ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4.7L V-8


7


ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5.7L HEMI V-8

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.


CAUTION!

•

Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.

•

If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

Immediate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas

7


cap until a

⬙ clicking

⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states which have an I/M (Inspection and

Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD system may

not

be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery replacement. If the OBD system is determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.

2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

3. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen: a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 seconds and then remain on until the first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s

OBD system is

not ready

and you should

not

proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system is

ready

and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD system is

not ready

you should see your dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may


need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update.

A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation, you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine Mopar

威 parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-Mopar

威 parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.

7


DEALER SERVICE

Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle.

Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE:


WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the

required

maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals, there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.

However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.

These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil Level

To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.


1. Position the vehicle on a level surface.

2. Turn Off the engine and allow approximately 5 minutes for the oil to settle to the bottom of the crankcase.

3. Remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).

4. Wipe the engine oil level indicator (dipstick) clean.

5. Install the engine oil level indicator (dipstick) and make sure it is seated in the tube.

6. Remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick), keeping the handle above the tip, and read the oil level on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).

7. Add oil only if the level is below the “SAFE” range (at or below the “ADD” mark) on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the ADD mark will result in a reading at the top of the SAFE range.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

7


Frequency Of Oil Change

Road conditions and your style of driving affect the interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the following to determine if

ANY

apply to you:

•

Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).

•

Stop and Go driving.

•

Extensive engine idling.

•

Driving in dusty conditions.

•

Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).

•

More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

•

Trailer towing, Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).

•

Off-Road or desert operation.

•

If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.

NOTE:

If

ANY

of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the

⬙

Maintenance Schedules

⬙ section of this manual.

If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule

⬙

A

⬙ of the

⬙



4x4 Models, If Used Primarily For Off-Road Operation

Every 50 hours of use.

Dusty Conditions

Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these conditions, special attention should be given to the engine air cleaner and the crankcase inlet air cleaner. The crankcase ventilation system should also be checked

periodically. Make sure that these units are always clean.

This will tend to reduce to a minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter the engine.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacture only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard

MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

Engine Oil Identification (API) Symbol

There is a symbol to aid you in selecting the proper engine oil.


This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacture only recommends

API Certified engine oils that meet the requirements of

DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)

For 3.7L/4.7L engines SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. For the 5.7L

engine SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.

7


For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the

Engine Compartment illustration in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use such a product, use

only

those oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity standard. Follow the service schedule that describes your driving type.

Materials Added to Engine Oils

The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar

威

Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.

Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tensioner

Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.

However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if required. See your authorized dealer for service. At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure. Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure. Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components.


Spark Plugs

Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine performance and emission control. The plugs installed in your vehicle should operate satisfactorily in normal service for the mileage indicated in the Maintenance

Chart. New plugs should be installed at this mileage. The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug. Check the Vehicle Emissions

Control Information label for the proper type of spark plug for your vehicle.

CAUTION!

When replacing plugs, do not overtighten. You could damage them and cause them to leak.

7


Ignition Cables

Replace the ignition cables (5.7L engines only) at the mileage interval shown in the maintenance charts.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on

Schedule “B”.

WARNING!

The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

Engine Fuel Filter

A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.

Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.

Catalytic Converter

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.


CAUTION!

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle.

NOTE:


7


WARNING!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

•

Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.

•

Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.

•

Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Maintenance-Free Battery

All Dodge trucks are equipped with maintenance-free batteries. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Always wash hands after handling the battery.

To determine the battery charge, check the battery test indicator (if equipped) on top of the battery. Refer to the illustration.


CAUTION!

It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.

Also, if a “fast charger” is used while battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a

“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

7


WARNING!

•

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information.

•

The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman.

Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

Power Steering — Fluid Check

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified

DaimlerChrysler Dealership.

⬙

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

Front Suspension Ball Joints

The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever the vehicle is serviced for other reasons. Damaged seals should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination of the grease.


Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints

All four wheel drive models are equipped with four constant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required. However, the joint boot should be inspected for external leakage or damage periodically. If external leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately. Continued operation could result in failure of the joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease. This would require complete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the

Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, doors,liftgate and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular

7


attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar

威

Lock

Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

Windshield Washers

The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. When freezing weather is anticipated, flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the system. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer antifreeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.

After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar

威

All

Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.


Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

7


WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow the preceding safety tips.

Cooling System

Inspection

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check face of radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean the radiator core by gently spraying water from a garden hose at the back of the core.

Check the coolant bottle tubing for condition and tightness of connection at coolant bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the coolant pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the coolant will begin to drain from the coolant bottle. Do not remove the pressure cap when the cooling system is hot.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don’t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. If you open the hood and see steam or hot coolant escaping from the radiator, don’t touch anything. Get away quickly.

Never try to open a pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

Cooling System Maintenance

At the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled. See your authorized dealer for proper cooling system maintenance.


Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment, it should be cleaned and flushed.

See your authorized dealer for proper draining, flushing and refilling of your vehicle’s cooling system.

Disposal of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. Do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals and children. If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

7


Recommended Engine Coolant

This vehicle has been factory filled with an Ethylene

Glycol based engine coolant with long life corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive

Technology). Follow the “Maintenance Schedule” for the recommended coolant change intervals. Refer to Fluids,

Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

CAUTION!

•

Mixing of coolants other than specified engine coolant, may result in engine damage, and decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible.

•

Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

•

This vehicle has not been designed for use with

Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

When adding coolant, or refilling the system, a minimum solution of 50% recommended HOAT ethylene glycol engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water should be used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below

⫺

34°F (

⫺

37°C) are anticipated.

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.

The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE:

Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes.


WARNING!

Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to cool overheated engine. The coolant is under pressure and severe scalding could result.

Coolant Pressure Cap

The coolant pressure cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.

The pressure cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

7


WARNING!

The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the coolant pressure cap are a safety precaution. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap when the system is hot or under pressure.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle system provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine idling, and warmed to normal operating temperature, remove the cap from the bottle, remove the dipstick and wipe the excess coolant from it. Reinsert the dipstick and remove. Observe the dipstick checking the holes along the stem for coolant. Check the coolant level whenever the hood is raised.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the pressure cap except checking coolant freeze point or replacement with new antifreeze coolant. Your service attendant should be advised of this.

When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

A. Do not overfill the coolant bottle.

B. Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant bottle. If antifreeze needs to be added, contents of coolant bottle also must be protected against freezing.

C. If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the level in the coolant bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.

D. Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT ethylene glycol engine coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine.

E. Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

F. Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean also.

G. The thermostat should not be changed for summer or winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance.

Emission Related Components

Fuel System Hoses And Vapor/Vacuum Harnesses

When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance, inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,


cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be given to examining hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed.

Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present.

NOTE:

Fluids such as oil, power steering fluid, and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle operation), should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage.

7


You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specified hoses and clamps, or their equivalent in material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is mandatory to replace all clamps that have been loosened or removed during service. Care should be taken in installing new clamps to insure they are properly torqued.

Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve

Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plugging because of deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the

PCV valve and passage with increasing mileage. Have the PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve –

Do not attempt to clean the PCV valve!

Check ventilating hose for indication of damage or plugging with deposits.

Replace if necessary.

Brake System

Power Disc Brakes (Front and Rear)

Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several hard stops during the break-in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.

Brake Master Cylinders

The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally low, check system for leaks.

Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

WARNING!

Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point, or is unidentified, as to specifications may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking. You could have an accident.


CAUTION!

Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.

WARNING!

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching on fire.

Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.

Brake Hoses

Inspection should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately!

Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with possible burst failure.

7


WARNING!

Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.

You could have an accident. If you see any sign of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake hoses replaced immediately.


Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180°F (82°C). This occurs after at least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.

To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly, the following procedure must be used:

1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature.

2. The vehicle must be on level ground.

3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal.

4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P (Park).

5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated.

6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”

(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube.

Do not overfill.

After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait

a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.

NOTE:

If it is necessary to check the transmission

below

the operating temperature, the fluid level should be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70°F ( 21°C) (room temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”

(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches

180°F ( 82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature.


7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.

To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube.

Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change

It is important that proper lubricant is used in the transmission. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine

Parts for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.

7

CAUTION!

Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F

(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading.


CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.

Transfer Case

Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the transfer case serviced immediately.

CAUTION!

Damage may result from operation of the vehicle with low transfer case fluid.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives to the transmission. Exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be avoided, since they may adversely affect seals.

The transfer case fluid should be drained and refilled at the intervals specified.

Lubricant Selection


Axles


The manufacturer does not recommend regularly scheduled oil changes for axles in vehicles whose operation is classified as normal truck service.

NOTE:

The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be encountered in some off-highway types of service, will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.

Rear Axle

Rear Axle fluid levels should be 7/8

⬙

(22 mm) below the fill hole for 8 1/4

⬙ axles, and 1 1/4

⬙

(31 mm) below the fill hole for 9 1/4

⬙ axles.


Front Axle

Front Axle fluid level should be 3/4” (20 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.

Selection of Lubricating Grease

The National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) has developed a symbol (Certification Mark) to aid the vehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for chassis components. This symbol, an example shown below, is located on the grease container and identifies the application and quality of the grease.

7


There are two groups identified, those for wheel bearings (Letter “G”) and those for chassis (Letter

“L”) lubrication. Performance categories within these groups result in dual letter designations for each group. The letter designations shown in the example are the highest quality level available and when combined as shown can be used for chassis lubrication. Use only those greases that have the NLGI symbol on the container along with the proper quality level for your application.

Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion

Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

•

Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

•

Stone and gravel impact.

•

Insects, tree sap and tar.

•

Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

•

Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

•

Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

•

If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.

•

Use Mopar

威 auto polish to remove road film and stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to scratch the paint.


•

Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch metal and painted surfaces.

Special Care

•

If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.

•

It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels and liftgate be kept clear and open.

7


•

If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

•

If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.

The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

•

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy soil, select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar

威 cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish.

•

If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.

•

If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

•

Use Mopar

威 touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

Interior Care

Use Mopar

威

Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

Use Mopar

威

Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and trim.

Mopar

威

Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar

威

Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.


Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.

Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

7


1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.

2. Dry with a soft tissue.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER (FUSE/RELAY)

Your vehicle is equipped with two electrical power distribution centers located next to each other in the left side of the engine compartment.

The power distribution centers house new plug-in

“Maxi” fuses which replace all the in-line fusible links previously used. The power distribution centers also contain “Mini”fuses and plug-in “ISO” relays. A label inside the latching cover of the Power Distribution Centers identifies each component for ease of replacement, if necessary. These fuses and relays can be obtained from your dealer.

FUSE BLOCK

CAUTION!

When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

NOTE:

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for longer than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may do this by disconnecting the battery or by disconnecting the two ignition-off draw

(I.O.D.) fuses located in the Auxiliary Power Distribution

Center (PDC) located in the engine compartment. The

I.O.D. cavities include a snap-in retainer that allows the


fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the fuse block. Pressing the I.O.D. fuse back into the cavity reconnects it.

Interior Fuses

The fuse block contains blade-type mini-fuses, relays, and circuit breakers for high-current circuits. It is located in the left kick panel. It is accessible through a snap-in cover.

7


Fuse Block

Cavity Mini Fuse/Color

F1 15 Amp Blue

F 2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

(2) 10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

25 Amp Natural

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

Description

Instrument Cluster Battery

Feed

Occupant Classification

Module (OCM) Battery Feed

Ignition Run/Start for Controller (NGC), Integrated

Power Module (IPM), AC

Relay and Fuel Pump Relay

Door Node and Non-

Memory Power Mirror

Switch Battery Feed

Airbags (2 Fuses in Yellow

Holder)

Ignition Run/Start Unlock

Radio Battery Feed

Ignition Run/Start for

Cluster/Transfer Case/Seat

Sw. Back lighting

SDAR/DVD Battery Feed

Spare

Cavity Mini Fuse/Color

F11

F12

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F20

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

15 Amp Blue

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

15 Amp Blue

25 Amp Natural

Description

Heated Mirrors

Cluster Battery Feed

Ignition Run HVAC

Module/Heated Rear Glass

(EBL) Relay

ABS Module Ignition Run

Battery Feed Blue Tooth,

Compass/Trip Computer

(CMTC), Sentry Key Diagnostics

Reconfigurable Power Outlets

Cigar Lighter Ignition

Spare Fuse

Heating & Air Conditioning w/ATC Only Battery Feed

Amplifier Battery Feed


Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)

Cavity

5

6

3

4

1

2

7

8

Cartridge

Fuse / Relay

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

40 Amp Green

30 Amp Pink

40 Amp Green

20 Amp Blue

40 Amp Green

40 Amp Green

Mini Fuse Description

Starter

Front Wiper

Brake Batt

JB Feed Acc #

2

Power Seats

JB Feed Ign #

1

JB Feed Ign #

2

JB Feed Acc

Delay

9

10

11

Spare

30 Amp Pink

40 Amp Green

ASD

Power Liftgate

( If Equipped)

7


21

22

23

24

25

26

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

Cavity

12

Cartridge

Fuse / Relay

40 Amp Green


30 Amp Pink

40 Amp Green

50 Amp Red

JB Feed / EBL

/ T Case

Brake

JB Feed RR

ABS Pump

10 Amp Red

Spare

JB Feed

Crank

20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump

20 Amp Yellow NGC

Spare

20 Amp Yellow ABS Batt

20 Amp Yellow NGC Batt

20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow

15 Amp Blue A/C Clutch

15 Amp Blue

Spare

JB Feed Stop

36

37

38

39

40

Cavity

27

31

32

33

34

35

28

29

30

Cartridge

Fuse / Relay

Relay

Relay

Spare

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Mini Fuse

10 Amp Red

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Relay

Relay

Description

JB Feed Acc #

1

Run Start

Run Remote

Starter

ETAX

AC Clutch

Fuel Pump

Rly

Brake Supression

Blower Motor

ASD Rly

Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module)

1

Cavity

Cartridge

Fuse / Relay

Relay


2

5

6

7

8

9

3

4

10

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

Wiper On/Off

Rly

Wiper Hi/Lo

Rly

Horn Rly

Rear Wiper

Rly

Lt T-Tow

Stop/Turn Rly

Rt T-Tow

Stop/Turn Rly

Park Lamps

Rly

Lt Park Lamps

T-Tow Park

Lamps

Rt Park Lamps


12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

Cavity

11

20

21

22

23

Cartridge

Fuse / Relay

Relay


30 Amp Pink

40 Amp Green

Rad Fan Hi

Rly

20 Amp Yellow FCM Batt #4


20 Amp Yellow Adjustable

Pedal

20 Amp Yellow Ft Fog Lamps

20 Amp Yellow Horn

20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper


20 Amp Yellow Lt T-Tow

Stop/Turn


20 Amp Yellow Rt T-Tow

Stop/Turn

FCM BATT # 5

Rad Fan

7


27

28

29

30

Cavity

24

Cartridge

Fuse / Relay

Relay

25

26

Relay

Relay


Rad Fan Lo

Rly

Ft Fog Lamps

Rly

Adjustable

Pedal Rly

30 Amp Green IOD #1

30 Amp Green IOD #2

Spare

Spare

REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS

LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.

Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2

Liftgate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

Overhead Console Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLW214–2A

Reading Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2

Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not Serviceable

LIGHT BULBS — Outside Bulb No.

Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13

Front Park/Turn/Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3457AK

Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057

Center High Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006LL

Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057

BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlights/Parking/Turn Signal

1. Remove the two bolts attaching the headlight to the inner fender panel.


2. Remove one nut that attaches the headlight to the inner fender panel. Access to the nut is possible by removing the fender panel access door which is located in the wheel liner.

3. Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the headlight from the fender panel.

4. While firmly holding the headlight in your hands disconnect all connectors by following the procedure described in step number 5 below.

5. Remove the bulb connector from the headlight making sure to pull and release the red tab on all connectors.

Loosen the connector by pressing down on the black and/or green release which is located below or above the red tab. The green release is located above the red tab on the H13, the black release is located above the 3457AK red tab.

7


6. Twist and remove socket from lamp.

7. Remove bulb from socket and replace.

NOTE:

These are Halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat build-up which reduces bulb life.

Rear Side Marker, Tail Lights, Turn Signals And

Backup Lights — Replacement

1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing.


2. Rotate the light to the outboard side of the vehicle and remove.

7


3. Unlock and remove electrical connector.

4. Remove the three screws holding the bulb strip to the back of the tail lamp.

5. Remove the bulb strip from the tail light lens.


6. Remove bulbs from bulb strip by pulling the bulb straight out.

7


License Lights

1. Remove the two screws securing the lens to the liftgate.

2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.


Center High-Mounted Stoplight

1. Remove two screws securing stoplight housing assembly to the liftgate.

3. Pull bulb from socket.

7


2. Turn socket 1/4 counterclockwise and free from housing.

Fog Lights

1. Rotate bulb and connector 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

2. Pull bulb off of connector.

NOTE:

For foglights ensure that the takeout pushfasteners are relocated back in their positions; one in the foglight molding and the other in the hydroform.

3. Pull bulb straight from socket to remove.


FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

Fuel

3.7L/4.7L, 87 Octane

5.7L, 89 Octane

Engine Oil (with filter)

3.7L, SAE 5W-30, API Certified



Cooling System (includes 2.1 Qts./2L for coolant bottle

3.7L without Rear Heat (Mopar

威

Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula)

3.7L with Rear Heat (Mopar

威



威



威



威



威


NOTE:

All fluid capacities are approximate.

U.S.

27 Gal.

27 Gal

5 Qt.

6 Qt.

7 Qt.

13.5 Qt.

14.5 Qt.

13.1 Qt.

14.2 Qt.

NA

16.6 Qt.

Metric

102L

102L

4.7L

5.7L

6.6L

12.9L

13.8L

12.5L

13.5L

NA

15.8L

7


FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component

Engine Coolant

3.7/4.7L Engine Oil

5.7L Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter

Spark Plugs

Fuel Selection 3.7L/4.7L

Fuel Selection 5.7L

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

Mopar

威

Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.

Use SAE 5W-30, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 or equivalent.

Use SAE 5W-20, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 or equivalent.

Mopar

威

Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.

Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.

87 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method

89 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method

Chassis

Component

Automatic Transmission

Transfer Case

Front Axle

Rear Axle

Brake Master Cylinder

Power Steering Reservoir


Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.

Mopar

威

ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Mopar

威


SAE 75W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.

SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.

Mopar

威

DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.

Mopar

威


7

CONTENTS


䡵

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 390

䡵

Emissions Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

䡵

Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

▫

Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

▫

Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

䡵

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in

bold type

on the following pages must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system. These, and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving.

Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected.

NOTE:

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.

EMISSIONS TESTING

In some localities, it may be or will become a legal requirement to ensure that all emissions components and systems are functioning properly as a part of the test procedure. The test center accomplishes this by checking the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD) system with an electronic scan tool. If your vehicle has recently been serviced, the OBD system may have been reset to a

⬙ not ready

⬙ condition because the OBD system has not had sufficient time since the servicing to reconfirm that emissions components are operating properly. In most cases, a reasonable mix and amount of normal city and highway driving and at least one overnight-off period will be required to prepare your vehicle for this check; however your dealer has the equipment and procedures required to make certain that the OBD system of your vehicle is ready for the required testing.


There are two maintenance schedules that show the

required

service for your vehicle.

First is Schedule

“B”

. It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule.

•

Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).

•

Stop and go driving.

•


•


•

Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).

•

More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).

•

Trailer towing.

•

Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).

•

Off-road or desert operation.

•


NOTE:

If

ANY

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 391


⬙



N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

NOTE:

If

ANY

of these apply to you then change your coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months, whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the

⬙



NOTE:

Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed for Schedule

⬙

B

⬙

.

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

Second is Schedule

“A”

. It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule

⬙

B

⬙

.

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

392 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months whichever comes first.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.

At Each Stop for Fuel

•

Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

•

Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.

Once a Month

•

Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.

•

Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.

•

Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.

•

Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation.

At Each Oil Change

•

•

•

•

Change the engine oil filter.

Inspect the exhaust system.

Inspect the brake hoses.

Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspension components.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 393

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

•

Check the automatic transmission fluid level.

•

Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

394 SCHEDULE “B”

Schedule “B”

Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions.

•

•

Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).

Stop and go driving.

•


•


•

Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).

•

More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).

•

Trailer towing.

•

Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).

•

Off-road or desert operation.

•


NOTE:

If

ANY


⬙



NOTE:

If

ANY

of these apply to you then change your coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months, whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the

⬙



Miles

(Kilometers)

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months whichever comes first.

Rotate tires.

Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.

Change rear axle fluid.

Change front axle fluid (4X4).

Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.

3,000

(5 000)

X

6,000

(10 000)

X

X

X

9,000

(15 000)

X

SCHEDULE “B” 395

12,000

(20 000)

X

X

X

15,000

(25 000)

X

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

X

X

X

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


Miles

(Kilometers)


Rotate tires.




Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).

Inspect brake linings.


Replace spark plugs.

Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**

18,000

(30 000)

X

X

X

21,000

(35 000)

X

X

24,000

(40 000)

X

X

X

27,000

(45 000)

X

30,000

(50 000)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Miles

(Kilometers)


Rotate tires.






33,000

(55 000)

X

36,000

(60 000)

X

X

X

X

39, 000

(65 000)

X


42,000

(70 000)

X

X

X

45,000

(75 000)

X

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

X

X

X

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


Miles

(Kilometers)


Rotate tires.








Inspect and replace ignition cables if necessary

(5.7L only).

48,000

(80 000)

X

X

X

51,000

(85 000)

X

54,000

(90 000)

X

X

X

X

57,000 60,000

(95 000) (100 000)

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Miles

(Kilometers)

Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required.

Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid, change filter (3.7L). This applies only if your vehicle is used for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change main sump filter (4.7L/5.7L only). This applies only if your vehicle is used for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Inspect transfer case fluid (4X4).

Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, or

102, 000 miles (170 000 km) whichever comes first.

48,000

(80 000)

51,000

(85 000)

54,000

(90 000)


57,000

(95 000)

60,000

(100 000)

X

X

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

X

X

X

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


Miles

(Kilometers)


Rotate tires.







63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000 75,000

(105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000) (125 000)

X X X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Miles

(Kilometers )


Rotate tires.










78,000

X

X

X

X


87,000

X

90,000

(130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)

X

81,000

X

84,000

X X

X

X

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


Miles

(Kilometers)


Rotate tires.


Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60 months.



93,000

(155 000)

X

96,000

(160 000)

X

X

X

99,000

(165 000)

X

102,000

(170 000)

X

X

X

X

X

X

Miles

(Kilometers)


Rotate tires.







Inspect and replace ignition cables if necessary (5.7L only).



105,000

X

X

X

X


(175 000) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)

X

108,000

X

111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000

X X X X

X

X

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

X

X

X

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


Miles

(Kilometers)

Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4).

Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid, change filter (3.7L). This applies only if your vehicle is used for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change main sump filter and spin-on cooler return filter if equipped. (4.7L/5.7L

only). This applies only if your vehicle is used for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170

000 km).

105,000

(175 000)

Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.

108,000

(180 000)

111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000

(185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)

X

X

X

X

Schedule “A”

Miles

(Kilometers)

[Months]

Change engine oil and engine oil filter.

Rotate tires.




Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace as necessary.


6,000

(10 000)

[6]

X

X

X

12,000

(20 000)

[12]

X

X

X

18,000

(30 000)

[18]

X

X

X

X

SCHEDULE “A” 405

24,000

(40 000)

[24]

X

X

X

30,000

(50 000)

[30]

X

X

X

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

X

X

X

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

406 SCHEDULE “A”

Miles

(Kilometers)

[Months]


Rotate tires.



Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170

000 km).


36,000

(60 000)

[36]

X

X

X

X

42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000

(70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000)

[42]

X

[48]

X

[54]

X

[60]

X

[66]

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Miles

(Kilometers)

[Months]



Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. *

Inspect and replace ignition cables if necessary (5.7L only).


36,000

(60 000)

[36]

42,000


60,000

[60]

X

X

X

66,000

(70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000)

[42]

48,000

[48]

54,000

[54] [66]

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

X

X

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


Miles

(Kilometers)

[Months]


Rotate tires.








72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000

(120 000) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000)

[72]

X

[78]

X

[84]

X

[90]

X

[96]

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Miles

(Kilometers)

[Months]


Rotate tires.


Drain and refill tranfer case fluid (4X4).

Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60 months.

Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).


Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace as necessary.



102,000

(170 000)

[102]

X

X

X

X

108,000

(180 000)

[108]

X

X

X

X


114,000

(190 000)

[114]

X

X

X

120,000

(200 000)

[120]

X

X

X

X

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E

X

X

X

X

L

E

D

U

S

S

C

H

E

8

D

U

L

E

S

S

C

H

E

8

N

T

E

N

A

M

A

I

N

C

E


Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:

•

Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The

I.O.D. cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the fuse block.

•

The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain.

•

As an alternative to the above steps you may disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

䡵

Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

▫

Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

▫

Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

▫

Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

䡵

If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

䡵

Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 415

䡵

Mopar

威

Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

䡵

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

▫

In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

䡵

Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

9

412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty, discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident, or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items, and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized

Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained

technicians, special tools, and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

•

If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.

•

If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.

Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer

Center should include the following information:

•

Owner’s name and address

•

Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

•

Dealership name

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413

•

Vehicle identification number

•

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 992-1997

DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone —(800) 465–2001

In Mexico contact:

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240

Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240

9


Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer

Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about your service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service

Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to your contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)

See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to this vehicle.

MOPAR

姞

PARTS

Mopar

威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from your dealer. They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy


campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–

9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC

20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

In Canada:

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to

Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B

3V9.

9


PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:

A street address is required when ordering manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).

•

Service Manuals.

These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler

Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams and charts.

•

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.

Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations, these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

•

Owner’s Manuals.

These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call Toll Free at:

•

1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

•

1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

Or

Visit us on the World Wide Web at:

•

www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com

•

www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals


9

INDEX

10

420 INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,260

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,316

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 346

Air Conditioner Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . 223,349

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,350

Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222,349

Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,282

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,191

Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,185

Alignment and Balance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 356,357,385

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,260

Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,185

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 27

Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,88

Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Automatic Headlights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,245,362

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,387

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 26

Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,147

Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260,360

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,260

Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

INDEX 421

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Warning Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,189

Brakes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 74

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,288

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,163,290

Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

10

422 INDEX

Cargo Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Cargo Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,347

CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,200

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,222

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65

Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,73

Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,371

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Climate Control, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,232

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,195,202,215

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Coolant Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 356,385,386

Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,225,230

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Dipsticks

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

INDEX 423

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Disposal

Used Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . 215

Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)

. . . . . . 142

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . 139,150,189

Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

10

424 INDEX

Jacking

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Tow Hooks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 390

Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Engine

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335,336

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,386

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,75,290

Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,385,386

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Ethylene Glycol Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Exhaust Gas Caution

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,75,290,354

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,353

Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,386

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Flashers

Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,183,378

Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,325

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,387

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Fluid Level Checks


Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Cooling System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 386

Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,384

Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,120

INDEX 425

Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,386

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,385

Tank Capacity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,370,371

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink

威

) . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,337

Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

10

426 INDEX

Gasoline, Reformulated

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Gauges

Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Odometer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Tachometer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,297

Gross Cargo Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,295

Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Headlights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Delay

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 137

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 137

Hitches

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

HomeLink

威

(Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 162

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65

Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,320

Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

INDEX 427

Key, Replacement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . 136,183,378

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,42

LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 67

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,131

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,191

Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

10

428 INDEX

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376,377

Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Door Ajar

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,189

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,184,384

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

High Beam/Low Beam Select

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,183

Interior

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,155

License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,184

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 190

Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,378

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 183

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren

(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Lubricating Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Lubrication, Body

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Lumbar Support

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 190,338

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Manual Transmission

Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

INDEX 429

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,88

Electric Powered

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339,415

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Occupant Classification System (OCS) . . . . . . . . . . 52

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,386

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

10

430 INDEX

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Disposal

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,386

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Recommendation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,385

Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,385

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,338

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink

威

) . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,247

Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,156

Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 156

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185,357

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 416

Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 269

Positive Crankcase Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Power

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,373

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,16

Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 170

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,350

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . 163,167

Programming Transmitters

(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,163,167

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 357

Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,200,222

Radio Reception

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193,200

Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

INDEX 431

Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Rearview Mirrors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Reception, Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 309

Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 311

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 220

Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

10

432 INDEX

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,69

Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Seat Belt Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,37

And Pregnant Women

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Adjustment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,185

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,390,391

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Service Manuals

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,195,202,215

Shifting


Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer

Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer

Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,183,378

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

INDEX 433

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,278

Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242


Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Steering

Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,350

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

10

434 INDEX

Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . 282

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 227

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 183

Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 269,282

Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,273

Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Inflation Pressures

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Jacking

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Load Capacity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,270

Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Replacement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Safety

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264,273

Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Spare Tire

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Torque Converter Clutch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Traction

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,187

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

INDEX 435

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Transaxle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,362

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,362

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,387

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Transmitter Battery Service

(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink

威

) . . 162

10

436 INDEX

Transmitter Programming

(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Tread Wear Indicators

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,183,378

Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,292

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Video Entertainment System

(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Warning Lights

(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Weight Load Carrying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,225,230

Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,139,352

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,352

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

INDEX 437

Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

10

NOTES

NOTES

NOTES